2010 Equinox

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 3-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-34
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-33
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-28
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-35
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-41
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-46
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-64
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-10
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction
iii
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the
GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the
CHEVROLET Emblem, the name
Equinox and the Equinox Emblem
are registered trademarks of
General Motors LLC.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase
or due to changes subsequent to
the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
rights reserved.
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
and the DTS logos and Symbol are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©
1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25798562 C Third Printing
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
©
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
2010 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iv
Introduction
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
“Made for iPod” means that an
electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically
to iPod and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. iPod is a
trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
www.helminc.com
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Introduction
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Symbols
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
I : Cruise Control
d : Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Doors
Interior Mirrors
Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Vehicle Security
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . .
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-7
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . .
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1-1
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-15
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Roof
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-15
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key, that is part of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
can be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press the button on the RKE
transmitter to extend the key.
Press the button and the key
blade to retract the key.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in. Be
sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 12‑6 or OnStar® System
on page 4‑39.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle.
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
1-3
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter will work up to 60 m
(195 feet) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
RKE without Remote Start Shown
The following may be available:
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking, see “Remote
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑34. If a
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock. If the driver
door is open when Q is pressed, all
doors lock except the driver door.
These settings can be modified.
1-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34.
Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 1‑12.
K (Unlock):
Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors, see
“Remote Door Unlock” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34. The turn signal
indicators flash to indicate unlocking
has occurred. For more information
see “Remote Unlock Light
Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑34.
Pressing K may also disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 1‑12.
V (Remote Liftgate Release):
First press K, then press and hold
V to unlock the liftgate. For
vehicles with the power liftgate,
press and hold V until the liftgate
begins to move to open the liftgate.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release one
time to locate the vehicle. The
exterior lamps flash and the horn
chirps. Press and hold 7 for at least
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed
again or the key is placed in the
ignition and turned to ON/RUN.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
For
vehicles with this feature, first press
Q then press and hold / to start
the engine from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 1‑5
for additional information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work
once the new transmitter is
programmed.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the “Replace
Battery in Remote Key” message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery in Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑31.
The battery is not rechargeable.
See your dealer to replace the
battery.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Vehicle Start
The vehicle may have this feature
that allows you to start the engine
from outside the vehicle.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This
button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start. To enable and disable remote
start, see “Remote Vehicle Start”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34.
Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will default to a
heating or cooling mode depending
on the outside temperature during a
remote start. Once the key is turned
to ON/RUN, the system will turn on
at the setting the vehicle was last
set to.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
1-5
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3
for additional information.
Extending Engine Run Time
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minutes will start
immediately.
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
1. Press
Q on the RKE transmitter.
2. Press and hold / for about
two seconds. The turn signal
lamps will briefly flash to confirm
the vehicle has been started.
The parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the
engine is running. The vehicle's
doors will be locked.
3. The key must be inserted and
turned to ON/RUN before
driving.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the key is
inserted and turned to ON/RUN.
For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
be extended once.
For example, if the engine has been
running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition switch must
be turned to ON/RUN and then back
to LOCK/OFF using the key, before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.
1-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
.
The oil pressure is low.
.
Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
To shut off the engine:
.
Press / until the parking lamps
turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Insert the key and turn it to ON/
RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
The key is in the ignition.
.
The hood or doors are not
closed.
.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
.
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
Door Locks
{ WARNING
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if:
.
WARNING (Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
(Continued)
To lock or unlock a door from the
outside of the vehicle, use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Pull the handle once
from the inside to unlock the door,
and a second time to open it.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Door Locks
When locking the doors with the
power lock switch and a door or the
liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch
twice or Q on the RKE transmitter
twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock
all the doors.
A. Door Unlock
B. Door Lock
C. Safety Lock
The power door lock switches are
located on the instrument panel.
.
Press (A) to unlock the doors.
.
Remove the key from the
ignition and press (B) to lock
the doors.
This feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition.
This feature can be programmed.
See “Delayed Door Lock” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1-7
Safety Locks
Rear door security locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
Press (C) to activate the safety
locks. Once activated, the LED light,
changes to amber.
Pressing the button again
deactivates the safety locks.
See Power Door Locks on
page 1‑7.
1-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
Liftgate (Manual)
.
{ WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑34.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will cause
the liftgate to be unlatched.
Always close the liftgate before
driving.
Liftgate (Power)
Power Liftgate Operation
{ WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
Keys, Doors and Windows
WARNING (Continued)
be in P (Park) to use the power
feature. The taillamps flash when
the power liftgate moves.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑34.
On vehicles with a power liftgate,
the switch is located on the
overhead console. The vehicle must
1-9
{ WARNING
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
The power liftgate has three modes
of operation. Mode selection is
controlled by the interior mode
switch.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Choose the power liftgate mode by
turning the dial on the switch until
the indicator lines up with the
desired position. The vehicle must
be in P (Park).
The three modes are:
MAX : The liftgate power opens to
the full open height.
3/4 : The liftgate power opens to a
reduced open height that can be set
by the vehicle operator. Use this
setting to prevent the liftgate from
opening into overhead obstructions
such as a garage door or roof
1-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
mounted cargo during power
operation. The liftgate can still be
fully opened manually.
.
Pressing the touchpad switch on
the liftgate outside handle to
open the liftgate.
for the system to hold it open.
If movement is stopped below that
minimum the liftgate closes.
OFF: The liftgate only operates
manually in this position.
Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
more effort than with a standard
manual liftgate.
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme
temperatures or low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
can still be operated manually.
In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,
the liftgate can be power opened
and closed by:
.
.
First pressing K and then
pressing and holding V on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter until the liftgate starts
moving. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 1‑3.
Pressing the power liftgate
button on the center of the mode
switch, located on the overhead
console.
Press and release & on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch to close
the liftgate.
Pressing any button, or the
touchpad switch while the liftgate is
moving stops it. Pressing the button
or RKE switch again reverses the
direction. The touch pad switch will
stop the liftgate from moving. There
is a minimum distance that the
power liftgate must already be open
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) while the power function is
in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) and accelerate before the
power liftgate latch is closed, the
liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the
vehicle. Always make sure the
power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
Keys, Doors and Windows
If you power open the liftgate and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the turn signals flash and
a chime sounds. The liftgate stays
open temporarily, then slowly
closes. See your dealer for service
before using the liftgate.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
during a power open or close cycle,
a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or open
position. After removing the
obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again. If the
liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate.
The “Manually Close Power Liftgate”
warning message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will
display. After removing the
obstructions, the liftgate will resume
normal power operation.
Your vehicle has pinch sensors
located on the side edges of the
liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body
and presses against this sensor, the
liftgate will reverse direction and
open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or
closed manually.
Setting the Power Liftgate
3/4 Mode
To change the liftgate stop position:
1. Turn the liftgate switch to the
3/4 mode position and power
open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement at
the desired height by pressing
any switch.
3. Press and hold the button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch until
the turn signals flash and a beep
sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1-11
When power opened with the
3/4 mode selected, the liftgate
stops at the new set position.
There is a minimum that the power
liftgate must already be open for the
system to hold it open. The liftgate
cannot be set to stop below that
minimum.
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, turn the mode switch to
the OFF position.
With the power liftgate disabled and
all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
can be manually opened and
closed. Manual operation of a
liftgate that also has power
operation requires more effort than
with a standard manual liftgate.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate, and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. With the power liftgate
1-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
disabled the liftgate electric latch will
still power latch once contact is
made with the striker. Always close
the liftgate before driving.
If the RKE button is pressed while
power operation is disabled, the turn
signals flash and the liftgate will
not move.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
Vehicle Security
Disarming the System
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities. This
vehicle has theft-deterrent features,
however, they do not make it
impossible to steal.
To disarm the system, do one of the
following:
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
Arming the System
To arm the system, either:
Q on the RKE transmitter.
.
Press
.
Or, lock the vehicle using the
key in the driver door.
The alarm automatically arms after
about 30 seconds. The security
light, located on the instrument
panel, flashes.
Press V on the RKE transmitter to
open the liftgate without setting off
the alarm. The system rearms when
the liftgate is closed.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
K on the RKE transmitter.
.
Press
.
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
.
Allow the alarm to time out after
about 30 seconds and reset
itself.
The alarm automatically disarms.
If the system is armed and any door
is unlocked without pressing K on
the RKE transmitter the alarm
sounds.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
If K is pressed and the horn
sounds, an attempted break-in has
occurred while the system was
armed.
Keys, Doors and Windows
If the alarm has been activated, the
“Theft Attempted” message will
appear on the DIC. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 4‑31 for
additional information.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The key
uses a transponder that matches
an immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged.
Immobilizer Operation
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1-13
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key. If the engine
does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
1-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
Exterior Mirrors
Power Mirrors
1. Move the selector switch to
L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
Convex Mirrors
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
To adjust the mirrors:
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror to the
desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that the side of the vehicle and
the area behind are seen.
4. Return the selector switch to the
middle position.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 7‑3 for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Keys, Doors and Windows
Park Tilt Mirrors
If the vehicle has the memory
package, the outside mirrors have
a park tilt feature. This feature
autiomatically tilts the outside
mirrors to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
This allows the driver to view the
curb for parallel parking.
The passenger and driver mirrors
return to their original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
off or to OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or
off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑34 for
more information.
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in
the center to move it for a clearer
view of behind your vehicle. Adjust
the mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind you. Push the
tab forward for daytime use and pull
it for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information on the
system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See the OnStar owner's
guide for more information about the
services OnStar provides.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1-15
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information on the
system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See the OnStar owner's
guide for more information about the
services OnStar provides.
O : Press to turn automatic
dimming on or off.
If the vehicle has a rear vision
camera (RVC) the O button for
turning the automatic dimming
feature on or off will not be
available. See Rear Vision Camera
(RVC) on page 8‑49 for more
information.
1-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light comes on each time the vehicle
is started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Keys, Doors and Windows
WARNING (Continued)
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
1-17
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows. The power windows work
when the ignition is in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 8‑29.
Programming the Power
Windows
Press or pull on the switch to lower
or raise the window.
1. Close all doors with the ignition
in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/
RUN position, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 8‑29.
Express Down Windows
Windows that have the
express‐down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press the
window switch fully and release it to
activate the express‐down feature.
The express mode can be canceled
at any time by briefly pressing,
or pulling the switch.
Uplevel shown, base similar
The power window controls are
located on each of the side doors.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Programming the power windows
may be necessary if the vehicle's
battery has been disconnected or
discharged.
To program the window:
2. Press and continue to hold the
window switch until the window
is fully open.
3. Pull up and hold the window
switch to close the window.
Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
1-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The window
lockout switch is located on the
driver door. This feature prevents
the rear passenger windows from
operating, except from the driver
position. Press the switch to turn
the lockout feature on or off. An
indicator light shows the feature
is on.
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the
driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the
side to cover the side window. It can
be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position also.
Roof
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switches used to operate it are
located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be
in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) to operate the sunroof. See
Ignition Positions on page 8‑28 and
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 8‑29.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Press and hold the front or
rear of the driver side switch to
open or close the sunroof. The
sunshade automatically opens
with the sunroof, but must be
closed manually.
.
Press and hold the front of the
passenger side switch to vent
the sunroof. Press and hold the
rear of the switch to close.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-open/Express-close
Anti-Pinch Feature
Press and release the front or rear
of the driver side switch to
express-open or express-close the
sunroof.
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof when it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature detects the object
and stops the sunroof from closing
at the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof then returns to the full-open
position.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1-19
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the tracks that
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise or plug the water
drainage system. Periodically open
the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
1-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
Seats and
Restraints
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . .
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-22
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-25
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-35
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-1
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-36
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . .
2-37
2-39
2-41
2-43
2-45
2-51
2-51
2-54
2-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have head restraints in all outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1. Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the release
button, located on the head
restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
2. Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to
make sure that it is locked in
place.
The vehicle's rear seat head
restraints are not adjustable.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
WARNING (Continued)
2-3
Power Seat Adjustment
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat position:
1. Pull the handle located at the
front of the seat.
2. Move the seat forward or
backward to adjust the seat
position.
3. Release the handle to stop the
seat from moving.
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Driver Seat with Power Seat
Control, Power Recline,
and Power Lumbar shown
A: Memory Seat Adjustment
B: Power Seat Adjustment
C: Power Recline Adjustment
D: Power Lumbar Adjustment
2-4
Seats and Restraints
Adjust the seatback by moving the
control (C) forward or rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 2‑5 for more information.
Adjust the lumbar support by using
the control (D). See Lumbar
Adjustment on page 2‑5 for more
information.
Memory Seats
Driver Seat with Power Seat
Control, Power Lumbar,
and Manual Recline shown
The vehicle may have a memory
seat allowing saved and recalled
seat settings. Controls (A) are
located on the outboard side of
the seat.
D: Power Lumbar Adjustment
To save:
E: Power Seat Adjustment
1. Adjust the driver seat, including
the seatback recliner, and both
outside mirrors, to a comfortable
position.
F: Manual Recline Adjustment
On vehicles with power seats, the
controls are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
Adjust the power seat by moving the
control (B) forward or rearward, up
or down, or by pressing the top or
bottom of control (E).
2. Press and hold the MEM button
and button 1 at the same time
until a beep indicates the
position is stored.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
A second seating and mirror
position can be programmed by
repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the
vehicle must be in P (Park). Press
and hold either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat, outside mirrors
and pedals, if available move to the
stored position. Releasing the
button before the stored position is
reached cancels the recall.
Entry using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter with
the remote recall feature on
automatically adjusts the seat and
mirrors. There is no adjustment
when the position has not been
changed by another seating
position.
When the remote recall feature is
on, the seat and mirror position will
be stored when the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF. It is stored according
to the RKE transmitter used to start
the vehicle.
Seats and Restraints
To stop recall movement of the RKE
remote recall feature, press one of
the power seat controls, memory
buttons, or power mirror buttons.
Memory Seat recall may stop if
the seat is blocked. Remove the
obstruction and then press the
memory button again. If the memory
function does not work properly, see
your dealer for service.
Easy Exit Seat
If the easy exit seat feature is on in
the Driver Information Center (DIC),
automatic adjustment occurs when
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF
and the driver door is opened. The
driver seat moves back.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34 for more information.
Lumbar Adjustment
Power Lumbar
Seats with power lumbar have
controls located on the outboard
side of the seat. See Power Seat
Adjustment on page 2‑3 for more
information.
Adjust lumbar support by using the
rocker switch (D) on the outboard
side of the driver seat.
Release the switch when the
seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-5
WARNING (Continued)
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Vehicles with manual reclining
seatbacks have a lever on the
outboard side of the seat. Lift the
lever and move the seatback to the
desired position, then release the
lever. The seatback should not
move when pushed or pulled.
2-6
Seats and Restraints
Power Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
On vehicles with power reclining
seatbacks, the switch is located on
the outboard side of the seat. See
Power Seat Adjustment on
page 2‑3 for more information.
Move the switch forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Do not have a seatback reclined if
your vehicle is moving.
Seats and Restraints
Heated Front Seats
Remote Start Heated Seats
When it is cold outside, the
heated seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote
vehicle start. The heated seats will
be canceled when the ignition is
turned on. Press the button to use
the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
On vehicles with heated front seats,
the controls are located near the
climate controls. To operate the
heated seats the ignition must be in
ON/RUN.
2-7
Press the button L to heat the seat
cushion and seatback.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press, the
heated seat will change to the next
lower setting, and then the off
setting. The lights indicate three for
the highest setting and one for the
lowest.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The heated seat indicator lights on
the button do not turn on during a
remote start.
The heated seat temperature
performance of an unoccupied seat
may be reduced. This is normal.
The heated seats will not turn on
during a remote start unless the
heated seat feature is enabled in
the vehicle personalization menu.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 1‑5 and "Remote Start
Auto Heat Seats" under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑34 for
more information.
2-8
Seats and Restraints
Rear Seats
Split Folding Seatbacks
With this feature, either side of the
rear seatback can be folded down
for more cargo space.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
rear seatback, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
2. Lift the lever located on the top
of the seatback.
1. To fold the seatback down:
3. Fold the seatback forward.
The rear safety belts must
be unbuckled and the front
seatbacks are not reclined.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Keep the seat in the upright locked
position when not in use.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift and hold the lever located on
top of the seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then
release the lever when the
seatback is in the desired
position.
Seats and Restraints
To slide the entire seat forward or
rearward:
Safety Belts
1. Lift and hold the release bar
under the front of the seat
cushion to unlock the seat.
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position.
3. Release the bar.
4. Try to move the seat back and
forth to endure the seat is locked
into place.
{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-9
{ WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 4‑14 for additional
information.
2-10
Seats and Restraints
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
2-11
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
2-12
Seats and Restraints
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home. And
the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than 65 km/h
(40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on
page 2‑37 or Infants and Young
Children on page 2‑39. Follow
those rules for everyone's
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
Q: What is wrong with this?
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-13
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
2-14
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING (Continued)
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
(Continued)
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
(Continued)
2-15
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
Lap-Shoulder Belt
2-17
Adjustment” later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 2‑21.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
2-18
Seats and Restraints
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. For outboard seating
positions, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing when the
safety belt is not in use. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on
the safety belt, near the guide loop.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Move the height adjuster up to the
desired position by pushing up on
the height adjuster.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it up or
down without pressing the release
button (A) to make sure it has
locked into position. Press the
release button to lower the height
adjuster.
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside
passenger position in the rear seat.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they need to be replaced, and other
new parts for the vehicle's safety
belt system may be required. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After a Crash on page 2‑22.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
2-19
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side
of the seatback.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-20
Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. The belt should not be twisted
and it should lie flat. The elastic
cord must be under the belt and
the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)
4. Buckle, position, and release the
safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide back into its storage
pocket located on the side of the
seatback.
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-21
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 4‑14 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on
page 2‑22.
2-22
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑15.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Seats and Restraints
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the trim.
Even if you do not have a right front
passenger seat in the vehicle there
is still an active frontal airbag in the
right side of the instrument panel.
Do not place cargo in front of this
airbag.
{ WARNING
Be sure that cargo is not near an
airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object
toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even
(Continued)
2-23
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
death. Secure objects away from
the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 2‑25 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑24.
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑26.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
2-24
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 2‑37 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 2‑39.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑15 for
more information.
Seats and Restraints
2-25
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
2-26
Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and
chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact
exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how
severe a crash is likely to be in time
for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
example:
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
2-27
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in
rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is
about to roll over, or in a severe
frontal impact.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
Airbag System on page 2‑22.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For
seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
2-28
Seats and Restraints
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑26 for more information.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat‐mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑28.
Seats and Restraints
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-29
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
2-30
Seats and Restraints
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 12‑14 and Event Data
Recorders on page 12‑15.
.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start, if equipped, to
start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system check.
When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑15.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags
and the roof-rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
Seats and Restraints
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This
is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-31
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑15.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
2-32
Seats and Restraints
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front
passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the
person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in the vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑15 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat ) on page 2‑51 or
Securing Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 2‑54.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if
adjustable, to make sure that the
vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat
cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2‑2.
Seats and Restraints
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child’s seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-33
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑35 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
2-34
Seats and Restraints
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
.
.
The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger
airbag when liquid is soaked
into the seat. If this happens, the
off indicator will be lit, and the
airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will also be lit.
Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn
on) the passenger airbag while a
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger
airbag is turned on, the on
indicator will be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑15 for
important safety information.
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
the seat.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 12‑12.
{ WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Seats and Restraints
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑30.
If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
2-35
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 12‑1.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 9‑55 for additional
important information.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 12‑1.
2-36
Seats and Restraints
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑15 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2‑28. See your
dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑15 for more information.
A crash can damage the airbag
systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑17 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
2-37
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑17.
2-38
Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING (Continued)
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In
a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-39
WARNING (Continued)
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
2-40
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Seats and Restraints
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an
infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-41
Child Restraint Systems
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
2-42
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑45 for
more information. Children can be
Seats and Restraints
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-43
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
2-44
Seats and Restraints
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑30 for additional
information.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, we
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints not be transported in the
vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever you install a child
restraint, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
If you need to secure more than one
child restraint in the rear seat,
review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint or the size of the child
restraint, you may not be able to
access certain safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints.
Seats and Restraints
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
A. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
A. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
B. Child restraint using LATCH
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
2-45
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
2-46
Seats and Restraints
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each LATCH
seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Top Tether Anchors
Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
The rear outboard seating positions
have exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
2-47
The top tether anchors for each rear
seating position are located on the
back of the rear seatback. You may
need to adjust the rear compartment
storage panel/cover in the rear
cargo area to access the anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑43 for
additional information.
2-48
Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
Seats and Restraints
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-49
2.2. Route, attach and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
2-50
Seats and Restraints
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Seats and Restraints
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat )
{ WARNING
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑45 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑45 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2-51
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 2‑43.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
2-52
Seats and Restraints
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑45 for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Armrest Retaining Strap
{ WARNING
2-53
center armrest before installing a
rear‐facing child restraint in the
second row center seat position.
A rear center armrest that is not
properly stowed and secured
could fall forward during a sudden
stop or collision. The armrest
could contact an infant secured in
a rear‐facing child restraint in the
center seat position. Fasten the
retaining strap onto the stowed
armrest before installing a
rear‐facing child restraint in
the rear center seat position.
Stow the rear seat center armrest.
Attach the retaining strap to the
armrest loop (A) and to the center
top tether anchor on the
seatback (B). Make sure the
retaining strap's clips are firmly
attached.
When new, the vehicle's glove box
materials included an armrest
retaining strap. Use it to secure the
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Install the rear-facing child restraint
using the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and the
instructions described previously.
2-54
Seats and Restraints
Remove the armrest retaining strap
before installing a forward facing
child restraint in the center seat
position, as it may interfere with the
attachment of the top tether to the
top tether anchor on the seatback.
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑43.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑30 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4‑15 for more information,
including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This
is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
WARNING (Continued)
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑30 for additional
information.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear‐facing child restraint, a
rear‐facing child restraint should not
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
Seats and Restraints
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑45 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑45 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
2-55
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑15.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
2-56
Seats and Restraints
instructions regrading the use of
the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑45 for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If
the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑30 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Storage
Storage
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1
Storage
Compartments
Additional Storage
Features
Instrument Panel Storage
Cargo Cover
There may be a storage
compartment on the instrument
panel. Pull the handle to open.
For vehicles with a cargo cover, use
it to cover items in the rear of the
vehicle.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever.
Cupholders
Two cupholders are in the center
console. Cupholders may be located
in the second row seat armrest. To
access, pull the armrest down.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with center console
storage, use the lever on the front
to open.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To remove the cover from the
vehicle, pull both ends toward each
other. To reinstall, place each end of
the cover in the holes behind the
rear seat.
Convenience Net
This vehicle may have a
convenience net located in the rear
of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo
tie-downs for storing small loads.
Do not use the net to store heavy
loads.
3-2
Storage
Roof Rack System
{ WARNING
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is
being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision,
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
Certified accessory carrier.
This vehicle may be equipped with
a roof rack. For roof racks that do
not have cross rails included,
GM Certified cross rails can be
purchased as an accessory. See
your dealer for additional
information.
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
cross rails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle's center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place. Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading the
vehicle. For more information on
vehicle capacity and loading, see
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The roof rack crossrails can be
locked in four positions along the
roof rack side rails.
Storage
3-3
Try sliding the crossrails forward
and backward to ensure that they
are correctly secured and that the
levers stay tight to the cross rails.
Do not stand on the plastic lower
body panels when loading cargo
on the luggage carrier.
Lift the lever to release and move
the crossrail.
Push the lever down to completely
engage into the side rail holes.
Position the crossrail on both sides
of the vehicle at the same time.
Slide the crossrails back and forth
until the lock pins engage in the
holes and a click is heard as the
pins align and the crossrail locks.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
When the roof rack is not in use,
lock one crossrail at the furthest
forward position and lock the other
crossrail at the furthest rearward
position to reduce wind noise.
3-4
Storage
2 NOTES
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and
Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 4-9
Clock (Without Date
Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-14
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-15
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-16
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . .
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . .
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . .
Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . .
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . .
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-2
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Messages . . . .
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Messages . . . .
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . .
Engine Power Messages . . . .
Fuel System Messages . . . . . .
Key and Lock Messages . . . . .
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-31
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System Messages . . . .
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Vehicle Messages . . .
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Messages . . . . .
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-34
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-34
OnStar® System
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Instruments and Controls
2 NOTES
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-3
4-4
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Instruments and Controls
A. Air Vents on page 7‑6.
B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 5‑3. Exterior Lamp
Controls on page 5‑1. Fog
Lamps on page 5‑3 (If
Equipped).
C. Instrument Cluster on
page 4‑12.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑7. Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 4‑8.
E. Power Door Locks on
page 1‑7.
F.
Instrument Panel Storage on
page 3‑1.
G. Safety Locks on page 1‑7.
H. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11.
Navigation System (If
Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual.
P.
I.
Cruise Control on page 8‑44.
J.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑4.
R. StabiliTrak System on
page 8‑43.
K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 4‑6.
L.
Horn on page 4‑7.
M. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑6.
N. Ignition Positions on page 8‑28.
O. Climate Control Systems on
page 7‑1 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 7‑3.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-5
Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Park on page 8‑32.
Q. Fuel Economy Mode on
page 8‑37 (If Equipped).
S. Cupholders on page 3‑1.
T.
Power Outlets on page 4‑10.
U. CD Player on page 6‑19.
V.
Driver Information Center
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑24.
W. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 5‑2.
X. Glove Box on page 3‑1.
4-6
Instruments and Controls
Controls
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar® System on page 6‑43,
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑42
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 6‑43 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 6‑46 or
Bluetooth (Navigation) on
page 6‑58, or the separate
navigation manual for more
information.
$ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down and in or out to a
comfortable position.
_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to
select an audio source.
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g (Push to®Talk):
For vehicles
with an OnStar , Bluetooth®,
or navigation system, press to
interact with those systems. See
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Toggle up or down to select the next
or previous favorite radio station or
CD track, DVD, if equipped, track,
or MP3 track.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to
increase the volume, press − to
decrease the volume.
Instruments and Controls
Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Move the lever to one of the
following positions:
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the
lever to z and then release. The
wipers stop after one wipe.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
( (Off): Turns the wipers off.
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
The time between wipes can be
adjusted. Turn the & band up for
more frequent wipes or down for
less frequent wipes.
1 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
2 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the right side of the
steering column.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 9‑26.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-7
Windshield Washer
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield. The
spray continues until the lever is
released. The wipers will run a
few times. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21 for information on filling
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
4-8
Instruments and Controls
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer
5 (Rear Wiper Delay):
The rear wiper controls are on the
end of the windshield wiper lever.
Push the
windshield wiper lever forward to
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever returns to its
starting position when released.
Sets a
delay between wipes.
= (Rear Washer):
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21.
{ WARNING
Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
position.
Z (Rear Wiper):
rear window wipes.
For continuous
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
from Global Positioning System
(GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, and
vehicle speed information.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
See Multi-Band Antenna on
page 6‑18 for the location of the
vehicle's antennas. The compass
system is designed to operate for a
certain number of miles or degrees
of turn before needing a signal from
the GPS satellites. When the
compass display shows CAL, drive
the vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
GPS signal is restored and provide
a heading again. See Compass
Messages on page 4‑28 for more
information on the messages that
may be displayed for the compass.
Instruments and Controls
Clock (With Date Display)
The infotainment system controls,
located on the instrument panel, are
used to access the time and date
settings through the menu system.
See Operation on page 6‑7 for
information about how to use the
menu system.
6. To save the time or date and
return to the Time and Date
Settings menu, press the 0
BACK button at any time or
press the MENU/SEL knob after
adjusting the minutes or year.
3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
Setting the Time and Date
1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the next value.
4-9
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Setting the Month & Day
Format
1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select MM/DD (month/day) or
DD/MM (day/month).
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
turn Auto Time Adjust on or off.
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select Time Zone, and then
select the Time Zone.
6. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
turn Daylight Savings on or off.
4-10
Instruments and Controls
Clock (Without Date
Display)
The infotainment system controls,
located on the instrument panel, are
used to access the time and date
settings through the menu system.
See Operation on page 6‑7 for
information about how to use the
menu system.
Setting the Time
1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings, or press
the H button.
3. Select Set Time.
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the next value.
6. To save the time and return to
the Time Settings menu, press
the 0 BACK button at any time
or press the SELECT button
after adjusting the minutes.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings, or press
the H button.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can
be used to connect electrical
equipment, such as a cellular
phone.
There are four accessory power
outlets in the following locations,
below the CD slot, inside the center
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
console storage, on the rear of the
center console storage, and in the
rear cargo compartment.
To use the outlets, remove the
cover. Close the outlet cover, when
not in use.
Notice: If electrical devices are
left plugged into a power outlet,
the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to
the battery. This would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always unplug all electrical
devices when turning off the
vehicle.
Certain electrical accessories
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlets and could
result in blown vehicle or adapter
fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional
information on the accessory power
outlet.
Instruments and Controls
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power
outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
4-11
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-12
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
US Version Shown, Canada Similar
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
The vehicle's speed can be selected
to display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and the speedometer
in either kilometers per hour (km/h)
or miles per hour (mph). Telltales on
the speedometer indicate whether
kilometers or miles were chosen.
The DIC will show the vehicles
speed after the limit on the
speedometer has been reached.
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver's door to show the old
mileage reading.
Here are some situations that can
occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
fuel gauge.
.
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
.
The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Fuel Gauge
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge shows about how much fuel
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel and
the low fuel light comes on, but the
vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-13
4-14
Instruments and Controls
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
United States
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
The passenger safety belt reminder
light is by the passenger airbag
status indicator.
Canada
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine.
If the indicator needle moves to the
hot side of the gauge towards the
colored line, the engine is too hot.
A temperature indicator light will
turn on.
If the vehicle has been operated
under normal driving conditions, and
the temperature indicator light
comes on, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
When the engine is started this light
and a chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
The light also begins to flash.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
come on.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
When the engine is started this light
and the chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind the
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
The light also begins to flash.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
Instruments and Controls
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
page 2‑22.
4-15
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑30 for
important safety information. The
overhead console has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started. Then
the light turns off.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not
see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
4-16
Instruments and Controls
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑15 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Charging System Light
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
displays a message.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 4‑28.
This light and a Transport Mode On
message display when the vehicle
is in Transport Mode. For more
information, see Key and Lock
Messages on page 4‑31.
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
Instruments and Controls
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications
on page 9‑4.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-17
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
4-18
Instruments and Controls
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected.
.
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 8‑56. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A
few driving trips should turn the
light off.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 8‑54.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer can
check the vehicle. The dealer
has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the key is in ON/
RUN and the light is not on.
.
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
Instruments and Controls
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Brake System Warning
Light
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working
4-19
{ WARNING
United States
Canada
The brake indicator light should
come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not come on have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light comes on
when the parking brake is set. The
light stays on if the parking brake
does not fully release. If it stays on
after the parking brake is fully
released, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the light comes on while driving, a
chime sounds. Pull off the road and
stop. The pedal might be harder to
push or go closer to the floor.
It might also take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑72.
4-20
Instruments and Controls
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. A chime may also sound when
the light comes on steady. Then
start the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but
not antilock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also
on, the vehicle does not have
antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑19.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑43 for more
information.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑24 for all brake related DIC
messages.
Traction Off Light
This light comes on if the Traction
Control System (TCS) either has a
problem or is turned off. DIC
messages appear in the DIC display
to help explain. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 4‑31
for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the
StabiliTrak system is off, the system
does not assist in controlling the
vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the
StabiliTrak system and the warning
light turns off.
Check the DIC for applicable
messages. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 4‑31
for more information.
Instruments and Controls
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑43 for more
information.
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
If the TCS warning light comes on
and stays on while driving, the
vehicle needs service.
Check the Driver Information Center
(DIC) for applicable messages. See
Ride Control System Messages on
page 4‑31 for more information.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑43 for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light
®
The StabiliTrak system or the
Traction Control System (TCS)
indicator/warning light comes on
briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
The indicator/warning light flashes
while the StabiliTrak or TCS system
is working to control the vehicle on
a low traction surface.
4-21
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 4‑33 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the tire
loading information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46 for more
information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
For vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑49 for more
information.
4-22
Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Fuel Economy Light
the center console near the shifter,
is pressed. For vehicles with a
Driver Information Center (DIC) an
ECO Mode On message displays.
See Fuel System Messages on
page 4‑30 for more information.
Press the switch again to turn off
the light and exit the fuel
saver mode.
Low Fuel Warning Light
United States Shown, Canada
Similar
This light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition is turned
on as a check to indicate it is
working. If it does not come on,
have it fixed.
For vehicles with the fuel economy
mode light, it comes on when the
eco (economy) switch, located on
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The low fuel warning light is a circle
located on the fuel gauge. This light
comes on and a chime sounds
Instruments and Controls
periodically when the vehicle is low
on fuel. The light goes off when fuel
is added to the fuel tank.
High-Beam on Light
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Fuel
System Messages on page 4‑30
for more information.
Security Light
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 5‑3 for more
information.
Lamps on Reminder
The high-beam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 5‑1 for more
information.
This light comes on if there is a
problem with the security system,
or if the vehicle has been
tampered with.
4-23
Fog Lamp Light
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 1‑12.
The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
For vehicles with the lamps on
reminder light, it comes on when the
lights are in use.
4-24
Instruments and Controls
Cruise Control Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The cruise control light is white
whenever the cruise control is set
and turns green when the cruise
control is active.
The light turns off when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑44 for more
information.
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). It displays
information about the vehicle and
warning messages if there is a
system problem detected. DIC
messages display in the center of
the instrument panel cluster. See
Vehicle Messages on page 4‑27 for
more information.
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑34 for
more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
Use the DIC buttons located in the
center of the instrument panel to
access different displays. The DIC
displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
information, and warning messages.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
It also shows the shift lever position,
the odometer, and the direction the
vehicle is driving.
DIC Buttons (with V shown, SET/
CLR version similar)
MENU: Press this button to get to
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu.
wx:
Use these buttons to scroll
through the items in each menu.
A small marker will move along the
page as you scroll through the
items. This shows where each page
is in the menu.
Instruments and Controls
V or SET/CLR (Set/Clear):
Use
this button to set or clear the menu
item when it is displayed.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press the MENU button until Trip/
Fuel Information Menu is displayed.
Then press x to scroll through the
following menu items:
Trip 1 and Trip 2
This display shows the current
distance traveled, in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
the last reset for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing the trip reset stem
or V or SET/CLR while the trip
odometer display is showing.
.
Trip 1
Fuel Range
.
Trip 2
.
Fuel Range
.
Average Fuel Economy
.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
.
Average Vehicle Speed
.
Timer
This display shows the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average
of the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
.
Digital Speedometer
Average Fuel Economy
.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn
.
Blank
This display shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). This number is calculated
based on the number of L/100 km
(mpg) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. The fuel
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-25
economy can be reset by pressing
V or SET/CLR while the Average
Fuel Economy display is showing.
The display may not reset to zero.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This display shows the current
fuel economy in either liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
per gallon (mpg). This number
reflects only the fuel economy that
the vehicle has right now and
changes frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average
economy, this display cannot be
reset.
Average Vehicle Speed
This display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this value. The average
speed can be reset by pressing V
or SET/CLR while the Average
Vehicle Speed display is showing.
4-26
Instruments and Controls
Timer
Turn-by-Turn
Unit
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press V or SET/
CLR while Timer is displayed. The
display will show the amount of time
that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the
ignition is off. Time will continue to
be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
which the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press V or SET/
CLR briefly while Timer is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and
hold V or SET/CLR.
This display is used for the OnStar
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
guidance. See OnStar® System on
page 4‑39 or the Navigation
manual, if the vehicle has
navigation, for more information.
Press V or SET/CLR to enter the
unit menu. Then press w or x to
switch between US or Metric when
the Unit display is active. Press V
or SET/CLR to confirm the setting.
This will change the displays on the
cluster and DIC to either metric or
English (US) measurements.
.
Unit
Digital Speedometer
.
Tire Pressure
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
per hour (mph). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
.
Remaining Oil Life
.
Blank
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
Press the MENU button until Vehicle
Information Menu is displayed. Then
press x to scroll through the
following menu items:
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Tire Pressure
The display will show a vehicle with
the approximate pressures of all
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).
Any time the tire pressures are
adjusted the system needs to
relearn the new pressures. To
relearn the tire pressures press V or
SET/CLR while the Tire Pressure
display is active. The display will
ask for confirmation of a relearn.
Press w or x to select Yes or No.
Then press V or SET/CLR to
confirm the selection. See Tire
Instruments and Controls
Pressure Monitor System on
page 9‑49 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑49 for
more information.
Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate of
the oil's remaining useful life.
If “Remaining Oil Life 99%” is
displayed, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the “Change Engine Oil Soon”
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑30. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. In
addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for
more information.
Remember, the Oil Life display must
be reset after each oil change. It
will not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the Oil Life display
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, press V or
SET/CLR while the Oil Life display
is active. The display will ask for
confirmation of a reset. Press w or
x to select Yes or No. Then press
V or SET/CLR to confirm the
selection. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 9‑11.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Compass on page 4‑8.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-27
Vehicle Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can press
V or SET/CLR to acknowledge that
you received the messages and to
clear them from the display. Some
messages cannot be cleared from
the DIC display because they are
more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. You will find the
possible messages that can be
displayed and some information
about them grouped by subject in
the following information.
4-28
Instruments and Controls
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Battery Saver Active
This message displays when the
vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
Low Battery
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 9‑24 for more information.
Service Battery Charging
System
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
Brake System Messages
Brake Fluid Low
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low, see Brake
Fluid on page 9‑22.
Compass Messages
CAL
This message is displayed when the
compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 4‑8.
–––
Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your
dealer for service.
Cruise Control Messages
Release Parking Brake
Apply Brake Before Cruise
This message is displayed as a
reminder that the parking brake is
on. Release it before you attempt to
drive.
If this message displays when
attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake and then try again.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Cruise Set to XXX
This message will display when the
cruise control is set and it will show
the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑44 for more
information.
Instruments and Controls
Door Ajar Messages
Rear Access Open
Door Open
This message will display along with
a symbol when the liftgate is open.
Close the liftgate completely.
A door open symbol will be
displayed on the DIC showing
which door is open. If the vehicle
has been shifted out of P (Park), a
“Door Open” message will also be
displayed. Close the door
completely.
Hood Open
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood
is open. Close the hood completely.
Manually Close the Power
Liftgate
This message will display if the
power liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle.
After removing the obstructions, the
liftgate will resume normal power
operation.
Engine Cooling System
Messages
A/C Off Due to High
Engine Temp
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back
on. You can continue to drive the
vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-29
Coolant Level Low Add
Coolant
This message will display if the
coolant is low, see Engine Coolant
on page 9‑15.
Engine Overheated — Idle
Engine
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
Engine Overheated — Stop
Engine
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
4-30
Instruments and Controls
High Coolant Temperature
Engine Oil Low – Add Oil
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot, see Engine
Overheating on page 9‑18.
This message displays when the
engine oil level is too low. Check the
oil level. See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.
Engine Oil Messages
Change Engine Oil Soon
Oil Pressure Low – Stop
Engine
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑11 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑24 for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for
more information.
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
Engine Power Messages
Engine Power Is Reduced
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Fuel System Messages
ECO Mode On
On some models, this message
displays when the fuel economy
mode has been turned on by
pressing the eco button near the
shift lever. See Fuel Economy Mode
on page 8‑37 for more information.
Fuel Level Low
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible.
Tighten Gas Cap
This message displays when the
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
Instruments and Controls
4-31
Key and Lock Messages
Service Park Assist
Service All Wheel Drive
Replace Battery In Remote Key
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the park assist
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays if a problem occurs with
this system. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the AWD
system needs service. See your
dealer.
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter needs to be
replaced.
Transport Mode On
This message displays when the
ignition is held in START for
15 seconds. The battery light may
also be flashing when this message
is displayed. To turn this message
off, start the vehicle and hold the
key in the START position for
15 seconds.
Object Detection System
Messages
Park Assist Off
This message is displayed when the
park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 8‑46.
Ride Control System
Messages
All Wheel Drive Off
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays when the rear drive system
is overheating. This message turns
off when the rear drive system cools
down. If the warning message stays
on for a while, you need to reset the
warning message. To reset the
warning message, turn the ignition
off and then back on again. If the
message stays on, see your dealer
right away. See All-Wheel Drive on
page 8‑38 for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Service Traction Control
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer
for service.
4-32
Instruments and Controls
Service Stabilitrak
Traction Control On
This message displays if there is a
problem with the StabiliTrak®
system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off
the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your dealer
for service. The vehicle is safe to
drive, however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
first turned on. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 8‑41 for
more information.
Stabilitrak Off
This message displays when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off. See
StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43
for more information.
Traction Control Off
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
Theft Attempted
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Airbag System Messages
Service Vehicle Messages
Service Airbag
Service AC System
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the air conditioning
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
Safety Belt Messages
Service Power Steering
Buckle Seatbelt
This message displays as a
reminder when the safety belt
is not buckled.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the power steering
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages
Service Tire Monitor System
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑49 for more information.
Tire Learning Active
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑49 for more information.
Tire Low Add Air To Tire
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low.
4-33
The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑21.
Transmission Messages
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on
page 9‑40, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24, and Tire Pressure on
page 9‑46.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the transmission. See
your dealer.
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button. The DIC
also shows the tire pressure values.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑24.
This message also displays “Left
Front”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”,
or “Right Rear” to indicate the
location of the low tire.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Service Transmission
Shift To Park
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to remove the key from
the ignition if the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
Transmission Hot – Idle
Engine
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
4-34
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
Vehicle
Personalization
3. Press the center of the
MENU / SELECT knob to select
the Vehicle Settings menu.
Ice Possible Drive With Care
The audio system controls are used
to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features.
The following list of menu items will
be available:
This message is displayed when ice
conditions are possible.
Turn Wiper Control to
Intermittent First
This message is displayed when
attempting to adjust the intermittent
wiper speed without intermittent
selected on the wiper control. See
Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑7.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
access the Configuration
Settings Menu.
MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the
center of this knob to enter the
menus and select menu items. Turn
the knob to scroll through the
menus.
0 BACK:
Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
Entering the Personalization
Menus
1. Turn the infotainment system on
and press the CONFIG button to
access the Configuration
Settings menu.
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to highlight Vehicle Settings.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Climate and Air Quality
.
Comfort and Convenience
.
Collision/Detection Systems
.
Languages
.
Lighting
.
Power Door Locks
.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
.
Return to Factory Settings
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
highlight the menu. Press the knob
to select it. Each of the menus is
detailed in the following information.
All of the menus may not be
available. Only those tied to the
features on your vehicle will be
shown.
Instruments and Controls
4-35
Climate and Air Quality
Air Conditioning Mode
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following will be
displayed:
This will allow you to select whether
or not the air conditioning comes on
automatically the next time the
vehicle is started. “On” means that
the air conditioning will be on at
start up, regardless of whether it
was on or off the last time the
vehicle was turned off. “Off” means
the air conditioning will be off at the
next start up, regardless of whether
it was on or off the last time the
vehicle was turned off. “Last
Setting” means that the when the
vehicle is started the air conditioning
will resume whichever setting it was
at the last time the vehicle was
turned off.
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on when using remote
start on cold days.
.
Auto Fan Speed
.
Air Conditioning Mode
.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Auto Fan Speed
This selection is available on
vehicles with the Automatic Climate
Control System. Choose from the
following blower speed settings:
High: Increased speed.
Low: Reduced speed.
Normal: Moderate speed.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Auto Fan Speed” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
highlight “High”, “Normal”, or “Low”.
Press the knob to confirm the
selection and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Air Conditioning Mode” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
highlight “On”, “Off”, or “Last
Setting”. Press the knob to confirm
your selection and go back to the
last menu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Remote Start Auto Heat
Seats” is highlighted to toggle
between “On” or “Off”. Press 0
BACK to confirm the selection and
go back to the last menu.
Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
.
Chime Volume
.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This allows you to turn the easy exit
seat feature on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Easy Exit Driver Seat” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
4-36
Instruments and Controls
“On” or “Off”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Chime Volume
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Chime Volume” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
“Normal” or “High”. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
This allows you to turn the park tilt
mirrors feature on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Reverse Tilt Mirror” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
“On” or “Off”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Collision/Detection Systems
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following
will be displayed:
.
Park Assist
Park Assist
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
Assist feature to be turned on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Park Assist” is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select “On”, “Off”,
or “Tow Bar”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
select the language. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Lighting
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
.
Vehicle Locator Lights
.
Exit Lighting
Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off.
.
English
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Vehicle Locator Lights” is
highlighted to toggle between “On”
or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
the selection and go back to the
last menu.
.
French
Exit Lighting
.
Spanish
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
Languages
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Instruments and Controls
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Exit Lighting” is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select “Off”,
“30 Seconds”, “1 Minute”,
or “2 Minutes”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Power Door Locks
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
.
Auto Door Unlock
.
Delayed Door Lock
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, this feature will keep the
driver's door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Unlocked Door Anti Lock
Out” is highlighted to toggle
4-37
between “On” or “Off”. Press 0
BACK to confirm the selection and
go back to the last menu.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Auto Door Unlock
.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
.
Remote Lock Feedback
.
Remote Door Unlock
.
Memory Remote Recall
.
Remote Vehicle Start
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Auto Door Unlock” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
“All Doors”, “Driver Door”, or “Off”.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
Delayed Door Lock
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors. If you want to
override the delay you can press the
power door lock on the instrument
panel.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Delayed Door Lock” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
“On” or “Off”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
and the following will be displayed:
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Remote Unlock Light
Feedback” is highlighted. Turn the
knob to select “Flash Lights” or
“Off”. Press the knob to confirm and
go back to the last menu.
4-38
Instruments and Controls
Remote Lock Feedback
Memory Remote Recall
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when unlocking
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
This allows the “Memory Remote
Recall” feature to be turned on or
off. “Memory Remote Recall” is
when the memorized settings will be
recalled as you unlock the vehicle.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Remote Lock Feedback” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
“Lights and Horn”, “Lights Only”,
“Horn Only”, or “Off”. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Remote Door Unlock
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Remote Door Unlock” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
“All Doors” or “Driver Door”. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Memory Remote Recall” is
highlighted to toggle between “On”
or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
the selection and go back to the
last menu.
Remote Vehicle Start
This allows the “Remote Vehicle
Start” to be turned on or off, if the
vehicle has this feature.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Remote Vehicle Start” is
highlighted to toggle between “On”
or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
the selection and go back to the
last menu.
Return to Factory Settings
Select “Return to Factory Settings”
to return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Turn the knob to select
“Yes” or “No”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Instruments and Controls
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see if
you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
4-39
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
the glove box.
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation
and Hands‐Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all
OnStar services are available on all
vehicles. For more information see
the OnStar Owner's Guide or
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all
times.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4-40
Instruments and Controls
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
an OnStar call center when Q is
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy. This
information usually includes the
vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑6 for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not
be functioning properly. Press Q
and request a vehicle diagnostic.
If the light appears clear (no light
is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-2
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
.
Sidemarker Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-1
The exterior lamp control is located
on the turn signal/lane change lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
to operate the exterior lamps.
O (Off): Turns the exterior
lamps off.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):
Turns the exterior lamps on and off
automatically depending on the
exterior light.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn/lane
change lever away from you to
turn the high beams on.
Pull the lever towards you to return
to low beams.
5-2
Lighting
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.
Flash-to-Pass
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with
the low‐beams or Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on or off.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever all the
way towards you. Then release it.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
system makes the low-beam
headlamps come on at a reduced
brightness in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamp band is in the
automatic position.
.
The transmission is not in
P (Park).
.
The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
.
The parking brake is released.
Fully functional Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
When the DRL are on the taillamps,
sidemarker, instrument panel lights
and other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel cluster will be lit.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
When the exterior lamp band is
turned to the headlamp position, the
low-beam headlamps come on. The
other lamps that come on with the
headlamps will also come on.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL
off, move the shift lever to P (Park).
The DRL will stay off until the shift
lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press this button, located on the
center of the instrument panel, to
make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the
flashers off.
Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb may
be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse,
see Fuses on page 9‑34 for more
information.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
control is located on the turn signal/
lane change lever.
Use the fog lamps for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
5-3
# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp
band on the lever to # and release
it, to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The band will return to its original
position.
The parking lamps or low‐beam
headlamps must be on to use the
fog lamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever
the high-beam headlamps are
turned on. When the high‐beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog
lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
5-4
Lighting
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
This control is located on the
instrument panel, to the left of
the steering column.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or
dim the lights.
Dome Lamps
1 (Door): The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
+ (On):
Turns the dome lamp on.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on
the overhead console. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
For manual operation, press the
button next to each lamp to turn it
on or off.
The dome lamp controls are located
in the overhead console. To change
the settings, press the following:
* (Dome Lamp Override):
Turns
the lamp off, even when a door
is open.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The dome lamp, cargo lamp and
foot lamp inside the vehicle come
on when any door is opened, if the
dome lamp is in the door position. In
addition, these lamps come on
when the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) unlock button is pressed.
They stay on for 20 seconds or until
a door is opened. After the door is
opened and then closed, the light
remains on for 20 seconds, or until
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Infotainment System
Infotainment
System
Audio Players
Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . .
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . .
Overview (Radio with
CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-7
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Storage
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . .
6-19
6-21
6-25
Introduction
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
6-28
{ WARNING
6-31
Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death
to you or others. Do not give
extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Rear Seat Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . .
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-1
6-42
6-43
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
6-46
6-58
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
6-2
Infotainment System
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 8‑3.
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Navigation/Radio System
This vehicle's infotainment system
may be equipped with a noise
reduction system which can work
improperly if the audio amplifier,
engine calibrations, exhaust system,
microphones, radio, or speakers are
modified or replaced. This could
result in more noticeable engine
noise at certain speeds.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑29 for more
information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.
The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to
the infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved to
a different vehicle.
Infotainment System
Overview (Radio with CD)
A. VOL/
.
B.
6-3
O
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
g SEEK
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
.
CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
.
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
D. AUX
.
Selects a connected
external audio source.
E. Buttons 1 to 6
.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
6-4
F.
Infotainment System
FAV
.
K.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
G. TONE
.
k
.
L.
I.
.
Opens the tone menu.
J.
Opens the settings menu.
M.
MENU/SEL
.
Press: Opens the menus
and selects menu items.
.
Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values while
in a menu. Manually
selects radio stations while
listening to the radio.
P.
Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
l SEEK
.
Radio: Seeks the next
station.
Q.
.
CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
R.
CD Slot
.
Selects the CD player
when listening to a
different audio source.
Z CD Eject
.
N.
CD: Pauses the CD.
.
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
.
CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
CD
H. CONFIG
.
O. INFO
5/0
.
Opens the phone
main menu.
.
Mutes the audio system.
H
.
0 BACK
.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Insert a CD.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Opens the clock menu.
Infotainment System
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM)
A. VOL/
.
B.
6-5
O
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
g SEEK
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
.
CD/DVD: Selects the
previous track or rewinds
within a track.
.
MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
.
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
D. MEM/DVD/AUX
.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
USB, or a connected front
or rear auxillary audio
source.
6-6
Infotainment System
E. Buttons 1 to 6
.
.
F.
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and
playlists.
J.
.
K.
FAV
.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
.
MEM: Opens the
favorites list.
G. TONE
.
CD/DVD Slot
L.
.
Radio: Pauses time shifted
content.
.
CD/DVD: Pauses CD/DVD‐
A and DVD‐V playback.
Stops DVD‐V playback.
.
MEM: Pauses MEM
playback.
I.
Opens the settings menu.
.
MENU/SEL
.
.
Press: Opens menus and
selects menu items.
Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values while
in a menu. Manually
selects radio stations while
listening to the radio.
M.
.
Radio: Seeks the next
station.
.
CD/DVD: Selects the next
track or fast forwards
within a track.
.
MEM: Selects the next
track or fast forwards
within a track.
O. INFO
.
CD/DVD: Records content
from audio CDs and MP3/
WMA CDs.
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
.
AUX: Records content
from USB mass storage
devices.
CD/DVD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
.
MEM: Shows available
information about the
current track.
O REC
H. CONFIG
.
l SEEK
k (Play/Pause)
.
Opens the tone menu.
N.
Insert a disc.
Z CD Eject
.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Removes a disc from the
CD/DVD slot.
P.
5 / 0 (Phone/Mute)
.
Opens the phone
main menu.
.
Mutes the audio system.
Infotainment System
Q. DEL
.
R.
MEM: Deletes the current
track from MEM.
0 BACK
Automatic Switch‐Off
Menu System
If the infotainment system has been
turned on after the ignition is turned
off, the system will turn off
automatically after ten minutes.
Controls
.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
Volume Control
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to
adjust the volume.
Operation
Controls
The infotainment system is operated
by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, menus that are
shown on the display, and steering
wheel controls, if equipped.
Turning the System On or Off
5 / 0 (Mute):
For vehicles with
OnStar®, press and hold 5 / 0 to
mute the infotainment system. Press
and hold 5 / 0 again, or turn the
VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
For vehicles without OnStar®, press
5 / 0 to mute the infotainment
system. Press 5 / 0 again, or turn
the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-7
The MENU/SEL knob and the
0 BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):
Press to:
.
Enter the menu system.
.
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
.
Confirm a set value.
.
Turn a system setting on or off.
Turn to:
.
Highlight a menu option.
.
Select a value.
0 BACK:
Press to:
.
Exit a menu.
.
Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
.
Delete the last character in a
sequence.
6-8
Infotainment System
Selecting a Menu Option
Activating a Setting
Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
move the highlighted bar.
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
highlight the setting.
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
highlight the function.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
select the highlighted option.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
activate the setting.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
turn the function on or off.
Submenus
Setting a Value
Entering a Character Sequence
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
change the current value of the
setting.
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
highlight the character.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
confirm the setting.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
select the character.
Infotainment System
Press the 0 BACK button to delete
the last character in the sequence
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
3. Press and hold the MENU/SEL
button until the value changes
to 0.
1. Press the TONE button.
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Fader or Balance.
2. Select Treble, Midrange,
or Bass.
3. Select the value.
3. Select the value.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-9
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
6-10
Infotainment System
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
System Settings
Auto Volume
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
The auto volume feature
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select EQ.
3. Select the setting.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Infotainment System
Maximum Startup Volume
Radio
The maximum volume played when
the Radio with CD is first turned on
can be set.
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
MENU/SEL: Turn to manually
search for stations.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to
search for stations. Press and hold
to fast forward and rewind time
shifted data. See “Time Shifting
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
later in this section.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-11
k : Press to pause and resume
time shifted data. See “Time Shifting
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
later in this section.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
RDS (Radio Data System)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
6-12
Infotainment System
Radio Menus
If the radio station is known:
Station Lists
Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK until the station on the
display is reached, then release
the button.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Press the MENU/SEL knob to open
the main radio menu for that band.
Selecting a Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
If the radio station is not known:
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK,
to automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
Briefly press l SEEK or g SEEK,
to automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
Manual Tuning
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select
the frequency on the display.
Favorites List
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
receivable stations in the current
reception area are displayed. If a
station list has not been created,
an automatic station search
is done.
3. Select the station.
Category Lists
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the
RDS stations sorted by program
type in the FM category list.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
To search for a programming type
determined by station:
2. Select Favorites List.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the station.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programming types available
displays.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Infotainment System
3. Select the programming type.
A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
4. Select the station.
The category lists are updated
when the station lists are
updated.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Updating Station & Category Lists
Storing a Station as a Favorite
If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in the
station list are no longer
received. A station search will be
completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
Retrieving stations
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
To cancel the station search, press
the MENU/SEL knob.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-13
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
FM/AM content. While listening to
the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered.
Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press the
k button again. The radio is no
longer live, but played from the time
shift buffer. A status bar displays
below the station number.
Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
6-14
Infotainment System
Press and release the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to jump forward or
back 30 seconds in the time shift
buffer.
When the radio station is changed,
the buffer is cleared and
automatically restarted for the
current station. Content from a
previously tuned station is no longer
available.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If AM/FM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current radio
station for up to 20 minutes. If the
vehicle is turned back on within
20 minutes, the radio resumes
playback from the paused point.
Satellite Radio
Control Buttons
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
The buttons used to control the XM
radio are:
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required to
receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go
to the previous or next station.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
k : Press to pause and resume
time shifted data. See “Time Shifting
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
later in this section.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations.
Press to open the XM Satellite
Radio menu.
Infotainment System
Selecting the XM Band
Selecting an XM Channel
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose between the AM, FM and
XM bands. The last channel played
in that band begins to play when
that band is selected.
XM channels can be selected by
using g SEEK, l SEEK, the
MENU/SEL knob, or the menu
system.
XM Categories
XM channels are organized in
categories.
Selecting a Channel Using
g SEEK or l SEEK
(Radio with CD)
.
Press and release g SEEK or
l SEEK to go to the previous
or next channel.
.
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK to scroll through the
previous or next channel until
the channel is reached.
Removing or Adding Categories
Channels in a category that have
been removed can still be accessed
by using the g SEEK or l SEEK
buttons, or the MENU/SEL knob.
To add or remove categories:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select XM Categories.
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
highlight the category.
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
remove or add the category.
Selecting a Channel Using
g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio
with CD/DVD and MEM)
Press and release g SEEK or
l SEEK to go to the previous or
next channel.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-15
Selecting a Channel Using the
MENU/SEL Knob
To select an XM channel using the
MENU/SEL knob:
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
highlight an XM channel, the
channel is selected after a short
delay.
To select a channel using the menu:
1. Turn the menu knob and select
Channel List.
2. Select the desired channel.
Selecting a Channel Using the
Menu System
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select XM Category List.
3. Select the category.
4. Select the channel.
6-16
Infotainment System
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
Channels from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
XM content. While listening to the
radio, the content from the current
channel is always being buffered.
Up to six channels can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
To store the channel to a position
in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1 to 6 button until
the channel can be heard again.
Retrieving Channels
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to change to
another favorite page. Briefly press
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
the channel.
Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press the
k button again. The radio is no
longer live, but played from the time
shift buffer. A status bar displays
below the channel number.
Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Press and release the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous song in the time shift
buffer.
When the channel is changed, the
buffer is cleared and automatically
restarted for the current channel.
Content from a previously tuned
station is no longer available.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
Pausing XM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If XM is paused when the vehicle is
turned off, the radio continues to
buffer the current radio station for
up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is
turned back on within 20 minutes,
the radio resumes playback from the
paused point.
Infotainment System
XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, no
action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data, no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
6-17
No Artist Info: The system is
working properly. No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel.
CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
No Title Info: The system is
working properly. No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the XM
Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
No CAT Info: The system is
working properly. No category
information is available at this time
on this channel.
No Information: The system is
working properly. No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel.
No XM Signal: The system is
working properly. The vehicle may
be in a location where the XM signal
is being blocked. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
6-18
Infotainment System
Radio Reception
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can occur when
things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble
on the radio.
Cellular phone usage can cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
FM
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is located
on the roof of the vehicle. The
antenna is used for the AM/FM
radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite
Radio Service System, and GPS
(Global Positioning System); if the
vehicle has these features. Keep
the antenna clear of obstructions
for clear reception. If the vehicle
has a sunroof and it is open, the
performance of the AM/FM radio,
OnStar, XM system, and GPS can
be affected.
Infotainment System
Audio Players
CD Player
The CD player can play audio CDs
and MP3 CDs.
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in.) CDs.
Care of CDs
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
6-19
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
the disc from the center to the
outer edge.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Care of the CD Player
Control Buttons
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD player.
If a label is needed, label the top of
the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
CD: Press to choose between the
CD and AUX player.
l SEEK or g SEEK :
Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the CD that may
be available.
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.
Z (Eject):
Press to remove
the CD.
k : Press to pause a CD or MP3
track, press again to resume
playback.
6-20
Infotainment System
Inserting a CD
Selecting a CD Track
Fast Forward and Rewind
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
Using the control buttons:
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or
rewind within the current track.
.
Removing a CD
Press the
Z button.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
Using the CD Menu:
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
2. Select Tracks list.
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Press the CD button, if there is a
disc in the player it begins playing.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Using the control buttons:
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the track.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Using the CD Menu:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Playlists / Folders.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
Infotainment System
Searching for MP3 Tracks
CD/DVD Player
The search feature may take some
time to display the information after
reading the disc due to the amount
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the
disc is being read.
The CD/DVD player can play
CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,
MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.
Tracks can be searched by:
Care of CDs and DVDs
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
.
Folder View
To search for tracks:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
The CD/DVD player will not play
8 cm (3 in.) discs.
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-21
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
the disc from the center to the
outer edge.
Care of the CD/DVD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label the
top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD/DVD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
6-22
Infotainment System
Control Buttons
Removing a CD or DVD
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
Press the
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX.
l SEEK or g SEEK :
Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
Z button.
2. Select Tracks List.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button if
there is a disc in the player, it
begins playing.
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Press to remove
a disc.
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,
or DVD‐V, press again to resume
playback. Press and hold to stop a
DVD‐V disc.
3. Select the track.
Press the k button to pause a CD
or DVD‐A track. Press the k button
again to continue playing the track.
Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
Random Order
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks
Press and hold the l SEEK or
g SEEK button to fast forward or
Using the control buttons:
rewind within the current track.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
Inserting a CD or DVD
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the slot until it is
drawn in.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD/DVD slot.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the disc that may
be available.
Z (Eject):
Using the menu:
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Infotainment System
Playing an MP3 CD or DVD
Files that are not stored in folders
are displayed in the root
directory (disc).
The search rate increases if the
MENU/SEL knob is continuously
turned while searching in a list.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Using the control buttons:
.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
Using the CD or DVD Menu:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
4. Select the track.
Searching for MP3s on a CD
or DVD
To search for tracks:
It is normal for the search feature to
take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read.
2. Select Search.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-23
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu MENU/
SEL knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Recording an Audio or MP3
CD to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 6‑25 for more information.
6-24
Infotainment System
Playing a DVD‐V
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 6‑33 for
information about how to control a
Video DVD using the wireless
remote control.
Changing the Audio Stream
.
Cursor RIGHT
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
.
Cursor LEFT
2. Select Audio Stream.
.
Up Menu
3. Select Change Audio Stream.
Use the following actions to
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V
Disc while playing chapters.
Selecting a Chapter
4. Press MENU/SEL to change the
selection.
Using the control buttons:
Select Cancel to exit the menu.
.
Pause (Play)
.
Chapter List
.
Title List
.
DVD/DVD
.
DVD/AUX
.
AUX/DVD
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu
.
AUX/AUX
2. Select Chapter List.
Use the following actions to
navigate the title menu on a
DVD‐V Disc.
To navigate the menu:
.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
Using DVD Menu:
3. Select the chapter.
Pausing a DVD
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Pause, to pause the disc.
Select Unpause to start
playback.
Selecting a Title
.
Select / Enter
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
.
Cursor UP
2. Select Title List.
.
Cursor DOWN
3. Select the title.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select the action.
Infotainment System
Mass Storage
Media (MEM)
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the MEM track
that may be available.
Infotainment systems with MEM
storage are able to record up to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM
player can also time shift audio from
AM, FM, and XM™ radio.
k : Press to pause the track
currently playing, press again to
resume playback.
Music or content that is stored in
MEM that you did not create,
or have the right to distribute, must
be deleted before the sale or end of
the lease of the vehicle.
O REC: Press to record music
from a CD, DVD-A, or USB drive.
FAV (Favorites): Press to display
MEM favorites.
1‐6: Press to select a track or a
stored playlist.
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.
Control Buttons
Recording From Audio CDs
The buttons used to control the
MEM player are:
The infotainment system can record
the current song playing or all songs
from an audio CD to MEM. A status
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process
starts and disappears when the
process has ended. Copy protected
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
the MEM player.
l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-25
Recording to MEM
Press O REC, then select Record
Current Song or Record All Songs
on Disc. If the track has started
playing, the system will restart the
track and begin recording from the
beginning of the track. When the
song recording is completed, the
message Song Recorded to MEM
displays, and there may be a slight
pause.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored
as the current date, disc and track
number.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM, the message The
Song(s) is Already Recorded
displays.
6-26
Infotainment System
Stopping the Recording
Press the O REC button while
recording from an audio CD to
display the stop recording option.
Select Stop Recording Song
to MEM.
Renaming Recorded Discs
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed.
Recording From MP3/WMA
Discs or USB Storage Devices
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM, the message The
Song(s) is Already Recorded
displays.
USB Supported Devices
Stopping the Recording
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Recording to MEM
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
Press O REC, then select Record
Current Song or Record Current
Folder.
3. Select the disc.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename
either one.
5. Use the menu knob to enter
the character sequence. See
Operation on page 6‑7 for
more information.
The information stored by MEM is
titled according to the ID3 tag
associated with it.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Press the O REC button while
recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
USB storage device to display the
stop recording option. Select Stop
Recording Song to MEM.
Deleting Tracks From MEM
Individual tracks and all tracks can
be deleted from MEM.
To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while
the track is playing.
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
Infotainment System
6-27
Playing From MEM
To search for tracks:
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
To remove MEM favorites
categories:
2. Select Search.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select
a track if MEM is already playing
from the previously recorded disc.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
2. Select Radio Settings.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
4. Remove the check mark from
the box to remove that MEM
favorites category.
1. Select Recorded Disc List.
2. Select the disc.
3. Select the track.
Searching For a Track
Shuffle Songs
.
Playlists
Select the Shuffle Songs option
from the MEM menu to randomly
play back tracks stored in MEM.
.
Artists
Configuring MEM Favorites
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
During MEM playback, press the
FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite
categories are:
Tracks can be searched for by:
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Genres
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
3. Select MEM Favorites.
Replace the check mark to re-add
the removed category.
Saving MEM Tracks as
Favorites
Favorites can be saved by pressing
and holding one of the 1 to 6
buttons. Favorites can be stored
according to the following list:
Playlist: Adds currently playing
track to the playlist selected.
Artist: Saves the artist associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
6-28
Infotainment System
Album: Saves the album
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
position.
Genre: Saves the genre associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
Creating Playlists
To create a playlist using tracks
stored in MEM:
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD)
The auxiliary input allows portable
devices to be connected using the
3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
optional USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑7.
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites.
3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled
using the controls on the device.
Adjusting the Volume
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
USB Port
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
2. Select the track to be stored in
the playlist.
3. Press and hold one of the
1 to 6 buttons until the track
can be heard again to store the
track.
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store
additional tracks in the playlist.
The auxiliary input is located in the
center console.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
iPod's
.
PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
.
USB Drives
.
Zune's
Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives,
and Zune's are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Infotainment System
6-29
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
To search for tracks:
On: Repeats the current track.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the Infotainment System.
2. Select Search.
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
Connecting an iPod
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
.
Podcasts
.
Genres
.
Audiobooks
.
Composers
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
4. Select the track.
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
Shuffle
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or
Off, then press the 0 BACK button
to return the main screen.
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
Repeat
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press the
0 BACK button to return the main
screen.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
.
Podcasts
.
Genres
6-30
Infotainment System
To search for tracks:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists*
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
.
Folder View
Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device.
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
Connecting a USB Drive
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Searching For a Track
Repeat Functionality
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Repeat to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
It is normal for the search feature to
take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
To search for tracks:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Infotainment System
Shuffle Functionality
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Repeat Functionality
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD/DVD/MEM)
The auxiliary input allows portable
devices to be connected using the
3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
optional USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑7.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Repeat to On or Off.
6-31
3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled
using the controls on the device.
Adjusting the Volume
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
USB Port
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
The following devices may be
connected to the USB port and
controlled by the infotainment
system.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
The auxiliary input is located in the
center console.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
iPod's
.
USB Mass Storage Devices
Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
6-32
Infotainment System
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Searching For a Track
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the Infotainment System.
.
Playlists
.
Artists
Connecting an iPod
.
Albums
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
.
Song Titles
Selecting a Track
.
Genres
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Using the control buttons:
.
Composers
Disconnecting a USB Drive
.
Audiobooks
A USB drive should be ejected from
the USB port before disconnecting
it. To eject a USB drive:
.
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
select the track in the current
sub menu. The track will start
to play.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs to On or Off.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Tracks can be searched for by:
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Files that are not stored in folders
are displayed in the root
directory (USB).
Connecting a USB Drive
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
To search for tracks:
2. Select USB Eject.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
2. Select Search.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Composers, or Audiobooks.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SEL knob
is continuously turned while
searching in a list.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Infotainment System
Selecting a Track
Tracks can be searched by:
Using the control buttons:
.
Playlists
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
.
Artists
.
Albums
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
select a track in the current sub
menu. The track will start to play.
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
.
.
Selecting a track in a different
folder:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
4. Select the track.
Searching for Tracks
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To search for tracks:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Composers, or Audiobooks.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SEL knob
is continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Recording Tracks to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 6‑25 for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-33
Rear Seat
Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's infotainment system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio
with a DVD player, two rear seat
video display screens, audio/video
jacks, two wireless headphones,
and a remote control. See CD/DVD
Player on page 6‑21 or the
separate navigation system manual
for more information on the vehicle's
DVD system.
6-34
Infotainment System
Before Driving
The RSE is for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving.
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system may not
work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F)
and below 60°C (140°F). If the
temperature is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until it is
within the operating range.
Global Off
Depending on the infotainment
system, the RSE system may
have a Global Off feature. The
Global Off feature disables all RSE
system features. Press and hold
the radio power button for more
than three seconds for Global Off
to disable the RSE features.
On some infotainment systems, the
Global Off feature can be turned off
by performing one of the following:
.
Press and hold the radio power
button for more than
three seconds.
.
Insert or eject any disc.
.
Insert a DVD video disc.
.
Press the Remote Control power
button.
.
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
or the k button when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
.
Press the SRC button on the
steering wheel when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
.
Cycle the ignition.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Headphones
RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, and
Channel 2 is dedicated to any
external auxiliary device connected
to the A/V jacks. The headphones
are used to listen to various
multi‐media. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button,
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control. Turn the headphones off
when not in use.
Push the On/Off button to turn on
the headphones. A light on the
headphones comes on. If the light
does not come on, check the
batteries. Intermittent sound or static
can also indicate weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information.
Infotainment System
Infrared transmitters are on the top
of the left seatback video screen.
The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system is shut
off or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more
than three minutes. Moving too far
forward or stepping out of the
vehicle, can cause the headphones
to lose the signal or have static.
The headphones may automatically
turn off after four hours of
continuous use.
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not
be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool, dry
place.
If the foam ear pads become worn
or damaged, they can be replaced
separately from the headphones.
See your dealer for more
information.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume
control.
Battery Replacement
For best audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly,
with the headband over the top of
the head. L (Left) and R (Right)
are above the ear pads and are
indicators as to how the
headphones should be placed
on the head.
1. Loosen the screw to the battery
door located on the left side of
the headphones.
To change the batteries:
2. Slide the battery door open.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
4. Replace the battery door and
tighten the screw.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-35
Remove the batteries if the
headphones are not going to be
used for a long period of time.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
If available, the A/V jacks are
located on the rear of the floor
console. They allow audio or video
cables to be connected from an
auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
The A/V jacks are color coded:
.
Yellow for video input.
.
White for left audio input.
.
Red for right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system:
1. Connect the auxiliary device
cables to the A/V jacks.
2. Power on both the auxiliary
device and the RSE video
screen.
6-36
Infotainment System
Changing the Source on the Video
Display Screens
The image from the auxiliary device
can be switched between the video
display screens.
4. Press the AUX button a fourth
time to change the source of
both video screens to the DVD
player.
To change the display:
How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
1. Press the AUX button on the
remote control to change the
source of both video screens
from the DVD player to the
auxiliary device.
The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can be
changed from the setup menu using
the remote control. To change a
setting:
2. Press the AUX button a second
time to change the left video
screen source to the DVD player
and the right video screen to the
auxiliary device.
1. Press
3. Press the AUX button a third
time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
device and the right video
screen to the DVD player.
2.
z.
Use n, q, p, o and r to
select the settings.
3. Press z again to exit the
setup menu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following:
.
Wireless Headphones
.
Vehicle Speakers
The RSE system transmits the
audio signal to the wireless
headphones if an audio signal is
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The front seat passengers are able
to listen to playback from the A/V
jacks through the vehicle speakers
by selecting Rear A/V as the source
on the radio.
Infotainment System
Video Screens
The video screens are located in the
back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
To use the video screen:
Push the video screen down into its
locked position when it is not in use,
the screen turns off automatically.
Only the left RSE seatback console
contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones, they may
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs.
These LEDs are not on the right
video screen. Both seatback
consoles contain an infrared
receiver for the remote control.
They are located at the top of each
console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for
more information.
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-37
Video Screen Input Jack
Each video screen is equipped with
a video input jack to allow video
cables to be connected from an
auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
This signal will override any video
provided by the RSE system; either
the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
source. The RSE system must be
on for this input to operate.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at
the transmitter window at either
seatback console and press the
button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control. Check the
batteries if the remote control does
not seem to be working. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function
of the remote control.
6-38
Infotainment System
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
Radio DVD slot, the remote control
O button can be used to turn on the
video screen display and start the
disc. The infotainment system can
also turn on the video screen
display. See CD/DVD Player on
page 6‑21 or the separate
navigation system manual for
more information.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power):
Press to turn the
video screens on and off.
P (Illumination):
Press to turn the
remote control backlight on. The
backlight times out after several
seconds if no other button is
pressed.
v (Title): Press to return to the
main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the
cursor. After making a selection
press the enter button. This button
only operates when using a DVD.
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press to select the
highlighted choice in any menu.
z (Display Menu):
Press to adjust
the brightness, screen display
mode, and display the
language menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press to start
playing a DVD. Press to pause a
DVD while it is playing. Press again
to continue playing.
Depending on the infotainment
system in the vehicle, DVD
playback may be slowed down by
pressing s then [. Reverse slow
play by pressing s then r. Press
s again to cancel slow play.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the start of the
current track or chapter. Press again
to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
Infotainment System
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to
go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
r (Fast Reverse):
e (Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
{ (Subtitles):
Press to turn
ON/OFF subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing.
Press to
quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To
stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press s. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release r. This
button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Press to change the
camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature when the DVD is
playing.
[ (Fast Forward):
\ (Clear) (If Available):
Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
the video display between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera):
Press this
button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to
clear all numeric inputs.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-39
} 10 (Double Digit Entries)
(If Available): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers
greater than 9. Press this button
before inputting the number.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numbered keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
Replacing the Remote Control
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
Use a Toshiba® code set for
replacement universal remote
controls.
6-40
Infotainment System
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
1. Slide back the rear cover on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
Remove the batteries from the
remote control if unused for an
extended period of time.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be turned to
ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen.
There are black borders on the top
and bottom or on both sides or it
looks stretched out.
Check the display mode settings in
the setup menu by pressing the
display menu button on the remote
control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
or scrolls.
connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work.
Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push
Play but sometimes the DVD starts
where I left off and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was pressed one
time, the DVD player resumes
playing where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Infotainment System
6-41
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen may display
one of the following:
The auxiliary source is running but
there is no picture or sound.
Sometimes the wireless headphone
audio cuts out or buzzes.
Recommended Action
Check that the RSE video screen is
in the auxiliary source mode by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
Check for obstructions, low
batteries, reception range, and
interference from cellular telephone
towers or by using a cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on
correctly using the L (left) and R
(right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are
positioned properly with the
headband across the top of
the head.
I lost the remote and/or the
headphones.
See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is
sourced to the DVD player by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Disc Load/Eject Error or
Mechanical Error: There are disc
load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error or Unknown
Format: The disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
The disc is not from a correct
region.
No Disc Inserted: No disc is
present when the Z EJECT or
MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
on the radio.
6-42
Infotainment System
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Seatback
Console
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE
seatback console surface.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
touching or cleaning the screen as
damage could result.
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview)
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
infotainment system and voice
recognition are used to control the
system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of
the Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information about compatible
phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Steering Wheel Controls
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
voice recognition.
$ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
Infotainment System Controls
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 6‑7.
5 (Phone): Press to enter the
Phone main menu.
Voice Recognition
The voice recognition system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Infotainment System
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system. Use the
VOL/ O knob during a call to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. The system
maintains a minimum volume level.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 6‑7.
Pairing Information:
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
See the cell phone manufacturer
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a
Bluetooth phone is not connected,
calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available.
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide
for more information.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for FCC information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-43
To link to a different paired phone,
see “Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
6-44
Infotainment System
Pairing a Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four digit PIN number appears
on the display.
If the “Add new GPS device”
option is selected, the system
will start a search for Bluetooth
“Handsfree” profile devices just
like if “Add new Phone” was
selected . The additional GPS
location feature which would
provide the vehicle's GPS
location through the Bluetooth
Serial Port Profile is not
available.
5. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the system.
6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone and confirms the
name provided. This name is
used to indicate which phone is
connected.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the phone to delete and
follow the on screen prompts.
Linking to a Different Phone
7. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
To link to a different phone, the new
phone must be in the vehicle and
available to be connected to the
bluetooth system before the process
is started.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair
additional phones.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
3. Select Bluetooth.
2. Select Phone Settings.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
4. Select Device List.
2. Select Phone Settings.
5. Select the new phone to link to
and follow the on screen
prompts.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will be
deleted.
Infotainment System
6-45
Making a Call
Accepting or Declining a Call
Declining a Call
Radio with CD
When a call is received, the
infotainment system mutes and a
ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Decline and press the MENU/
SEL knob.
Accepting a Call
Switching Between Calls (Call
Waiting Calls Only)
1. Press the
5 / 0 button.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Operation on
page 6‑7 for more information.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
1. Press the
5 / 0 button.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Answer and press the MENU/
SEL knob.
Declining a Call
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Decline and press the MENU/
SEL knob.
2. Select Enter number.
Call Waiting
3. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Operation on
page 6‑7 for more information.
Call waiting must be supported on
the bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Accepting a Call
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Answer and press the MENU/
SEL knob.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To switch between calls:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
Conference Calling
Conference calling and three way
calling must be supported on the
bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select Enter Number.
6-46
Infotainment System
3. Enter the character sequence
then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in
Operation on page 6‑7 for
more information.
Muting a Call
4. After the call has been placed,
press the MENU/SEL knob and
choose Merge Calls.
To Cancel Mute
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 1
through 4. The amount of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
Ending a Call
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
select Hang Up.
To Mute a Call
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
select Mute Call.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
select Mute Call.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
select Enter Number.
2. Enter the character sequence,
see “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Operation on
page 6‑7 for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition)
Pairing
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Infotainment System
Pairing Information:
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
.
.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information changes or
the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
b / g.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-47
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four‐digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phone is
connected. The system confirms
the name.
6. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
6-48
Infotainment System
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
The system will respond “is
connected” if a phone is
connected to the vehicle.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. Say the name of the phone to be
deleted. If the phone name is
unknown, use the “List”
command for a list of all paired
phones. The system responds
“Would you like to delete <phone
name>? Yes or No”, followed by
a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
The system responds “OK,
deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
Infotainment System
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds “Please wait
while I search for other phones”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone
number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
1. Press
.
If another phone is found,
the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected”.
.
.
If another phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags that
are shared between the Bluetooth
and OnStar systems.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system
responds “Store, number
please”, followed by a tone.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.
.
If the system recognizes
the number, the response is
“OK, Storing”.
.
If the system does not
recognize the phone
number, the response is
“Store <Phone number>”.
“Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say
“Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number again.
b / g.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
6-49
4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds
“Please say the name tag”,
followed by a tone.
6-50
Infotainment System
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
.
If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No”
and repeat Step 5.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds with “Please say the
first digit to store”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back the
digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
The digit store command allows a
phone number to be stored by
entering the digits individually.
1. Press
.
b / g.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. After the complete number has
been entered, say “Store”. The
system responds “Please say
the name tag”, followed by
a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds “About to store <name
tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
Infotainment System
Using the Directory Command
Deleting Name Tags
The directory command lists all of
the name tags stored by the system.
To use the directory command:
The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:
1. Press
.
.
b / g.
.
Delete
.
Delete all name tags
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
Using the Delete Command
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
To delete name tags:
The delete command is used to
delete specific name tags.
1. Press
2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds “Directory” and lists all
stored name tags. The system
returns to the main menu when
the list is complete.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
.
2. Say “Delete”. The system
responds “Delete, please say
the name tag”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds “Would
you like to delete, <name tag>?
Please say yes or no”.
.
If the name tag is correct,
say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system
responds with “OK, deleting
<name tag>, returning to
the main menu.”
.
If the name tag is incorrect,
say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let's
try again, please say the
name tag.”
b / g.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
6-51
6-52
Infotainment System
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
The Delete All Name Tags
command deletes all stored phone
book name tags and route name
tags for OnStar, if stored.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The
system responds “You are about
to delete all name tags stored in
your phone directory and your
route destination directory. Are
you sure you want to do this?
Please say yes or no.”
.
Say “Yes” to delete all
name tags.
.
Say “No” to cancel the
function and return to the
main menu.
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
.
Dial
.
Digit Dial
.
Call
.
Re‐dial
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Using the Dial Command
1. Press
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Dial using <phone name>.
“Number please”, followed by
a tone.
Infotainment System
3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
.
.
If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number.
If the system does not
recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is
not correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number again.
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press
.
.
b / g.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds “Digit dial using
<phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial”, followed by
a tone.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-53
3. Say the digits to be dialed one at
a time. The system repeats back
the digit it heard followed by
a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The
system responds “OK, Dialing”
and dials the number.
.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
6-54
Infotainment System
Using the Call Command
1. Press
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
.
.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds
“Call using <phone name>.
Please say the name tag”,
followed by a tone.
If the system recognizes
the name tag it responds
“OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number.
If the system does not
recognize the name tag, it
confirms the name tag
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number.
If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
name tag again.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press
b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The
system responds “Re‐dial using
<phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the
connected Bluetooth phone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Infotainment System
6-55
Receiving a Call
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
1. While on a call, press b g. The
system responds with “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
To Mute a call
.
.
b g to answer the call.
Press c / $ to ignore a call.
Press
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier.
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
2. Say “Three‐way call”.
The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say
dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b g to link all the callers
together.
.
To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
Ending a Call
.
Press c / $ to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Press
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
c / $ to end a call.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds “Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds
“Resuming call”.
6-56
Infotainment System
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell
Phone
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
responds “Transferring call” and
the audio transfers to the cell
phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
For vehicles without a navigation
system, press b g during a call
with the audio on the cell phone,
the audio transfers to the vehicle.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, press b g during a call
with the audio on the cell phone.
If the audio does not transfer to the
vehicle, use the audio transfer
feature on the cell phone. See the
cell phone manufacturers user guide
for more information.
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
1. Press
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
b / g.
.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
.
The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Infotainment System
.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and the numbers
stored as name tags during a call.
Use this feature when calling a
menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can also be stored for use.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Say a number to send tones”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
If the system does not
recognize the number, it
responds “Dial Number,
please say yes or no?”,
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The
system responds “Say a name
tag to send tones”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
.
6-57
If the system does not
recognize the name tag, it
responds “Dial <name tag>,
please say yes or no?”,
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are
sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
Paired Phone and Deleting
Name Tags.
6-58
Infotainment System
Bluetooth (Navigation)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using
the infotainment controls, see
“Overview” under Introduction,
in the Navigation supplement.
Bluetooth Pairing
To make calls with a Bluetooth cell
phone through your vehicle, it must
be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
Refer to the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth pairing instructions. If a
Bluetooth phone is off or not
connected, calls will automatically
be made using the OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling feature,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information
about OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability cannot be connected to
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Pairing Information:
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone based on the order
shown in the device list.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth system at a time.
.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
To link to a different paired phone,
see “Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Pairing a Phone
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Infotainment System
location through the Bluetooth
Serial Port Profile is not
available.
6-59
system voice prompt then
repeats the name you provided
for confirmation, say “Yes”.
5. The system responds with
“phone name has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
displayed on the screen.
3. Select “Add New Phone”, the
pairing process will begin
searching for Bluetooth devices
on your cellular phone. See the
cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for information on this
process.
If the “Add new GPS device”
option is selected, the system
will start a search for Bluetooth
“Handsfree” profile devices just
like if you had selected “Add
new Phone”. The additional GPS
location feature which would
provide the vehicle's GPS
On the cell phone, locate the
device named “General Motors”.
Follow the instructions given on
the cell phone or follow the voice
prompts, to enter the four digit
PIN number that has been
provided.
4. The system voice prompt
requests that you say the name
you want used for the phone that
is being paired. Use a name that
best describes the phone. The
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
6-60
Infotainment System
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu.
A list of all previously paired phones
will be displayed. If there is a
currently connected phone, a check
mark will appear on the right side of
the Phone name.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Infotainment System
3. Select the Device List submenu.
4. Select the phone to be deleted
and then follow the on screen
prompts to delete the device
from the system.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-61
5. Once a phone has been deleted,
the only way to connect back to
that phone is to pair the phone
again. See “Bluetooth Pairing”
earlier before the process is
started.
6-62
Infotainment System
Linking to a Different Phone
In order to link to a different phone,
the new phone must be in the
vehicle and available to be
connected to the Bluetooth system
before the process is started.
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. Select the phone to be linked
and then follow the on screen
prompts.
Infotainment System
6-63
Making a Call
Press 5 located on the faceplate of
the infotainment system, to access
the phone menu.
5. The Phone menu will be
displayed with the name of the
phone linked.
2. Enter the desired number by
touching the appropriate buttons
on the screen or using the
rotary knob.
Enter Number
3. Press the CALL button to make
the call.
Use this option to enter a phone
number and make a call. To do this:
Accepting or Declining an
Incoming Call
1. Press the Enter Number
selection. A dial pad displays on
the Navigation screen.
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes any
audio being played and sounds a
ring tone.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-64
Infotainment System
Accepting a Call
Call Waiting
Conference Calling
Press b g on the steering wheel
control to answer the incoming call
or touch the Answer option to
answer the call.
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Conference and three-way calling
must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless
service carrier to work.
Switching Calls (Only Available
with Call Waiting)
This feature allows you to switch
between calls, making one call
active and placing the other on hold.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
1. Press the 5 hard key on the
faceplate until the Phone main
screen is shown with the current
active call.
Declining a Call
Press c / $ on the steering wheel
controls or select the Decline option
to decline the call.
Switch Call: Turn or press the
menu select knob to “Switch Call”
and press Enter or touch the
“Switch Call” option.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2. Select the “Enter Number”
option.
Infotainment System
Ending a Call
6-65
Mute or UnMute a Call
1. Press the
5 hard key.
2. Select the Mute call option to
mute the call.
3. Select the Mute call option again
to unmute the call.
3. Make another call. The first call
will be placed on hold while the
second call is dialing and
connected.
4. To make a conference call,
select the “Merge Calls” option
which will merge both calls into
one conference call.
1. Press the
5 hard key.
2. Select Hang Up.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 2
through 4. The amount of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6-66
Infotainment System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call, this is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
1. Press the
5 hard key.
2. Select “Enter Number” option
and enter the number sequence.
The DTMF Tones will be generated
on the network as you enter each
number.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Climate Controls
7-1
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems
The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
D. Outside Air
E. Defrost
F.
Rear Window Defogger
G. Recirculation
H. Air Conditioning
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase
or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob completely to T to turn the
fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn to
increase or decrease the
temperature.
7-2
Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: To
change the current mode, select
one of the following:
F (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and the
floor outlets.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
W (Defog):
Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window outlets.
Air Conditioning
Rear Window Defogger
# (Air Conditioning):
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns off
after about 10 minutes. It can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF. If turned on again, it runs for
about five minutes before
turning off.
Press to
turn the air conditioning on or off.
If the fan is turned off or the outside
temperature falls below freezing, the
air conditioning will not work.
h (Recirculation):
Press to turn
on the recirculation. An indicator
light comes on. Air is recirculated
inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle or
prevent outside air and odors from
entering.
% (Outside Air):
Press to turn
on the outside air. An indicator light
comes on. Outside air is circulated
throughout the vehicle.
For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control System
The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
with this system.
Without Heated Seats
A. Fan Control
F.
B. AUTO
G. Power
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
H. Air Conditioning
D. Defrost
I.
Rear Window Defogger
E. Recirculation
J.
Outside Air
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Temperature Control
7-3
7-4
Climate Controls
To place the system in
automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
needed.
Manual Operation
O (Power): Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
With Heated Seats
A. Fan Control
Automatic Operation
B. AUTO
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation to
heat or cool the vehicle to the
selected temperature.
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase
or decrease the fan speed.
Adjusting the fan speed while in
automatic mode places the fan
under manual control. The AUTO
indicator light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains in automatic
control.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation.
Temperature Control: Turn to
increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. Defrost
E. Recirculation
F.
Temperature Control
G. Power
H. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats
I.
Rear Window Defogger
J.
Air Conditioning
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Climate Controls
H / G (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press mode up or mode
down to cycle through the different
air delivery modes. The current
mode is shown on the display.
Select from the following:
F (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and the
floor outlets.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
W (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window outlets.
Selecting defrost disables the
automatic mode.
For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to
turn the air conditioning on or off.
If the fan is turned off or the outside
temperature falls below freezing, the
air conditioning will not work. When
in AUTO, the air conditioning will
come on automatically as needed.
h (Recirculation):
Press to turn
on the recirculation. Press to
alternate between recirculation and
outside air, if the vehicle does not
have a separate outside air button.
The indicator light turns on when
recirculation is selected. Air is
recirculated inside the vehicle.
It helps quickly cool the air inside
the vehicle or prevent outside air
and odors from entering.
% (Outside Air, If Equipped):
Press to turn on the outside air. An
indicator light comes on. Outside air
is circulated throughout the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
7-5
Rear Window Defogger
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns off
after about 10 minutes. It can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF. If turned on again, it runs
for about five minutes before
turning off.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
L / M (Driver and Passenger
Heated Seats): For vehicles with
heated seats, see Heated Front
Seats on page 2‑7.
7-6
Climate Controls
Sensors
Air Vents
The solar sensor, located on top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
Use the air outlets, located in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel, to direct the
airflow. Use the thumbwheels
located near the center air outlets,
to open or close off the airflow.
The climate control system uses the
information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the
system will not work properly.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
.
Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2 for replacement
intervals. To find out what type of
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
Climate Controls
The passenger compartment air
filter can be accessed by removing
the entire glove box.
4. Remove the glove box.
8. Install the new air filter.
5. Locate the service door for the
passenger compartment air filter.
9. Close the service door and
latches.
1. Open the glove box completely
and locate the stop tab on top of
the glove box door.
6. Push the two tabs upwards and
release the latches holding the
service door. Lift the
service door.
10. Re‐install the glove box.
2. Push the stop tab upwards until
the stop tab is under the
instrument panel assembly and
the glove box is released.
7. Remove the old air filter.
3. Unsnap the tabs beneath the
glove box that connects it to the
bottom of the instrument panel
assembly.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
7-7
7-8
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Driving and Operating
Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 8-19
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 8-20
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-23
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes
8-28
8-28
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-33
8-33
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-35
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-1
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . .
8-38
8-40
8-40
8-41
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-46
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-54
8-2
Driving and Operating
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . .
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-54
8-54
8-55
8-56
8-57
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-57
8-58
8-61
8-63
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.
8-64
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Driving and Operating
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
page 2‑9.
{ WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-3
Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
8-4
Driving and Operating
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on
page 8‑43.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 9‑4.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑19.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle and
others is important.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic
following distances eliminates a lot
of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Driving and Operating
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 9‑4.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
(2.4L L4 Engine)
steering assist is lost because the
electric power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in
either direction several times until it
stops, or hold the steering wheel in
the stopped position for an
extended amount of time, you may
notice a reduced amount of power
steering assist. The normal amount
of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal
steering movements.
The electric power steering system
does not require regular
maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems, such as
abnormally high steering effort for a
prolonged period of time, contact
your dealer for service repairs.
If the engine stalls while driving, the
power steering assist system will
continue to operate until you are
able to stop the vehicle. If power
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-5
Hydraulic Power Steering
(3.0L V6 Engine)
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
8-6
Driving and Operating
Steering in Emergencies
Off-Road Recovery
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
The vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like these. First
apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 8‑4. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
Driving and Operating
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-7
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
8-8
Driving and Operating
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with all‐wheel drive can be
used for off‐road driving. Vehicles
without all‐wheel drive should not be
driven off-road except on a level,
solid surface.
Many of the vehicle design features
that help make the vehicle more
responsive on paved roads during
poor weather conditions also help
make it better suited for off‐road use
than conventional passenger
vehicles. The vehicle does not have
features usually thought to be
necessary for extended or severe
off‐road use such as special
underbody shielding and transfer
case low gear range.
The airbag system is designed to
work properly under a wide range of
conditions, including off‐road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and
observe safe driving speeds,
especially on rough terrain.
Drinking and driving can be very
dangerous on any road and this is
certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special
alertness and driving skills, your
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment
can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident
if you drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking.
Before You Go Off-Roading
Off-roading can be great fun but has
some definite hazards. The greatest
of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not
marked, curves are not banked, and
there are no road signs. Surfaces
can be slippery, rough, uphill,
or downhill.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers. Failure to operate the
vehicle correctly off‐road could
result in loss of vehicle control or
vehicle rollover.
Off-roading involves some new
skills. That is why it is very
important that you read these
driving tips and suggestions to help
make off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Have all necessary maintenance
and service work done.
.
Make sure there is enough fuel,
that fluid levels are where they
should be, and that the spare
tire is fully inflated.
.
Be sure to read all the
information about all-wheel-drive
vehicles in this manual.
.
Make sure all underbody
shields, if the vehicle has them,
are properly attached.
.
Know the local laws that apply to
off-roading where you will be
driving or check with law
enforcement people in the area.
.
Be sure to get the necessary
permission if you will be on
private land.
Driving and Operating
Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving
{ WARNING
.
.
Cargo on the load floor piled
higher than the seatbacks
can be thrown forward during
a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured.
Keep cargo below the top of
the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the
load floor can be tossed
about when driving over
rough terrain. You or your
passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
WARNING (Continued)
.
Heavy loads on the roof raise
the vehicle's center of gravity,
making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or
fatally injured if the vehicle
rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on
the roof. Keep cargo in the
cargo area as far forward and
low as possible.
8-9
There are some important things to
remember about how to load your
vehicle.
.
The heaviest things should be
on the floor, forward of the rear
axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
.
Be sure the load is properly
secured, so things are not
tossed around.
You will find other important
information under Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑24 and Tires on
page 9‑40.
8-10
Driving and Operating
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide
wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also
raises environmental concerns. We
recognize these concerns and urge
every off-roader to follow these
basic rules for protecting the
environment:
.
.
Always use established trails,
roads, and areas that have been
specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving and
obey all posted regulations.
Avoid any driving practice that
could damage shrubs, flowers,
trees, or grasses or disturb
wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking
down trees, or unnecessary
driving through streams or over
soft ground.
.
Always carry a litter bag and
make sure all refuse is removed
from any campsite before
leaving.
.
Take extreme care with open
fires (where permitted), camp
stoves, and lanterns.
.
Never park your vehicle over dry
grass or other combustible
materials that could catch fire
from the heat of the vehicle's
exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip,
especially when going to a remote
area. Know the terrain and plan
your route. Get accurate maps of
trails and terrain. Check to see if
there are any blocked or closed
roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with
at least one other vehicle in case
something happens to one of them.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to
read the winch instructions. In a
remote area, a winch can be handy
if you get stuck but you will want to
know how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road
Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an
area that is safe and close to home
before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and
different skills.
Tune your senses to different kinds
of signals. Your eyes need to
constantly sweep the terrain for
unexpected obstacles. Your ears
need to listen for unusual tire or
engine sounds. Use your arms,
hands, feet, and body to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Driving and Operating
Controlling the vehicle is the key to
successful off-road driving. One of
the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher
speeds:
.
You approach things faster and
have less time to react.
.
There is less time to scan the
terrain for obstacles.
.
The vehicle has more bounce
when driving over obstacles.
.
More braking distance is
needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
{ WARNING
When you are driving off-road,
bouncing and quick changes in
direction can easily throw you out
of position. This could cause you
to lose control and crash. So,
whether you are driving on or off
the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety
belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over
many different kinds of terrain. Be
familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-11
Surface Conditions: Off-roading
surfaces can be hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces
affects the vehicle's steering,
acceleration, and braking in different
ways. Depending on the surface,
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction,
and longer braking distances can
occur.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or
hidden obstacles can be hazardous.
A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared
for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow,
or even the rise and fall of the
terrain itself.
8-12
Driving and Operating
Some things to consider:
.
Is the path ahead clear?
.
Will the surface texture change
abruptly up ahead?
.
Does the travel take you uphill or
downhill?
.
Will you have to stop suddenly
or change direction quickly?
When driving over obstacles or
rough terrain, keep a firm grip on
the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,
or other surface features can jerk
the wheel out of your hands.
When driving over bumps, rocks,
or other obstacles, the wheels can
leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you
cannot control the vehicle as well or
at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved
surface, it is especially important to
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind
of alertness from driving on paved
roads and highways. There are no
road signs, posted speed limits,
or signal lights. Use good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up,
down, or across a hill. Driving safely
on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what the
vehicle can and cannot do. There
are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Many hills are simply too steep
for any vehicle. If you drive up
them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control
your speed. If you drive across
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
WARNING (Continued)
them, you will roll over. You could
be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the
steepness, do not drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, decide if
it is too steep to climb, descend,
or cross. Steepness can be hard to
judge. On a very small hill, for
example, there may be a smooth,
constant incline with only a small
change in elevation where you can
easily see all the way to the top.
On a large hill, the incline may get
steeper as you near the top, but you
might not see this because the crest
of the hill is hidden by bushes,
grass, or shrubs.
Driving and Operating
Consider this as you approach a hill:
.
.
.
.
Is there a constant incline,
or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
Is there good traction on the
hillside, or will the surface cause
tire slipping?
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive
up the hill:
.
Use a low gear and get a firm
grip on the steering wheel.
.
Get a smooth start up the hill
and try to maintain speed. Not
using more power than needed
can avoid spinning the wheels or
sliding.
Is there a straight path up or
down the hill so you will not
have to make turning
maneuvers?
{ WARNING
Are there obstructions on the hill
that can block your path, such
as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
.
What is beyond the hill? Is there
a cliff, an embankment, a
drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know.
It is the smart way to find out.
.
Is the hill simply too rough?
Steep hills often have ruts,
gullies, troughs, and exposed
rocks because they are more
susceptible to the effects of
erosion.
Turning or driving across steep
hills can be dangerous. You could
lose traction, slide sideways, and
possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When
driving up hills, always try to go
straight up.
.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Try to drive straight up the hill if
at all possible. If the path twists
and turns, you might want to find
another route.
8-13
.
Ease up on the speed as you
approach the top of the hill.
.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to be
more visible to approaching
traffic on trails or hills.
.
Sound the horn as you approach
the top of the hill to let opposing
traffic know you are there.
.
Use headlamps even during the
day to make the vehicle more
visible to oncoming traffic.
{ WARNING
Driving to the top (crest) of a
hill at full speed can cause an
accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff,
or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a
hill, slow down and stay alert.
8-14
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to
stall, and you cannot make it up
the hill:
.
Push the brake pedal to stop the
vehicle and keep it from rolling
backwards and apply the
parking brake.
.
If the engine is still running, shift
the transmission to R (Reverse),
release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in
R (Reverse).
.
If the engine has stopped
running, you need to restart it.
With the brake pedal pressed
and the parking brake still
applied, shift the transmission to
P (Park) and restart the engine.
Then, shift to R (Reverse),
release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
.
While backing down the hill, put
your left hand on the steering
wheel at the 12 o'clock position
so you can tell if the wheels are
straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back
down the hill with the wheels
straight rather than in the left or
right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will
increase the possibility of a
rollover.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, when going up
a hill:
.
Never attempt to prevent a stall
by shifting into N (Neutral) to
rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will
not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and could
go out of control.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Never try to turn around if about
to stall when going up a hill.
If the hill is steep enough to stall
the vehicle, it is steep enough
to cause it to roll over. If you
cannot make it up the hill, back
straight down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back
down the hill and decide you just
cannot do it, set the parking brake,
put your transmission in P (Park),
and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit
on the uphill side and stay clear of
the path the vehicle would take if it
rolled downhill.
Driving and Operating
Driving Downhill
{ WARNING
When off-roading takes you
downhill, consider:
.
How steep is the downhill? Will I
be able to maintain vehicle
control?
.
What is the surface like?
Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
.
.
Are there hidden surface
obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
What is at the bottom of the hill?
Is there a hidden creek bank or
even a river bottom with large
rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill
safely, try to keep the vehicle
headed straight down. Use a low
gear so engine drag can help the
brakes so they do not have to do all
the work. Descend slowly, keeping
the vehicle under control at all
times.
Heavy braking when going down
a hill can cause your brakes to
overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a
serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Things not to do when driving down
a hill:
.
When driving downhill, avoid
turns that take you across the
incline of the hill. A hill that is not
too steep to drive down might be
too steep to drive across. The
vehicle could roll over.
.
Never go downhill with the
transmission in N (Neutral),
called free-wheeling. The brakes
will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-15
Vehicles are much more likely to
stall when going uphill, but if it
happens when going downhill:
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the
regular brakes and apply the
parking brake.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still
braking, restart the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release
the parking brake, and drive
straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get
out and get help.
8-16
Driving and Operating
Driving Across an Incline
across an incline, the narrower
track width — the distance
between the left and right
wheels — might not prevent the
vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Driving across an incline
puts more weight on the downhill
wheels which could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
An off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. To decide
whether to try to drive across the
incline, consider the following:
{ WARNING
Driving across an incline that is
too steep will make your vehicle
roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the
incline, do not drive across it.
Find another route instead.
.
A hill that can be driven straight
up or down might be too steep to
drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the
length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to
the rear wheels — reduces the
likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when driving
.
Surface conditions can be a
problem. Loose gravel, muddy
spots, or even wet grass can
cause the tires to slip sideways,
downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
etc. — and roll over.
.
Hidden obstacles can make the
steepness of the incline even
worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the
downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, the vehicle can tilt
even more.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
For these reasons, carefully
consider whether to try to drive
across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does
not mean you have to drive it. The
last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to
slide sideways, turn downhill. This
should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side
slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so
you know what the surface is like
before driving it.
Driving and Operating
Stalling on an Incline
{ WARNING
Getting out on the downhill (low)
side of a vehicle stopped across
an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be
crushed or killed. Always get out
on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing
an incline, be sure you, and any
passengers, get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder
to open. If you get out on the
downhill side and the vehicle starts
to roll over, you will be right in
its path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,
or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow,
or sand, the wheels do not get good
traction. Acceleration is not as
quick, turning is more difficult, and
braking distances are longer.
It is best to use a low gear when in
mud — the deeper the mud, the
lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does
not get stuck.
When driving on sand, wheel
traction changes. On loosely packed
sand, such as on beaches or sand
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This affects steering,
accelerating, and braking. Drive at a
reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
If you have to walk down the slope,
stay out of the path the vehicle will
take if it does roll over.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-17
Hard packed snow and ice offer the
worst tire traction. On these
surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example, the
traction is so poor that you will have
difficulty accelerating. And, if the
vehicle does get moving, poor
steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
{ WARNING
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
or rivers can be dangerous.
Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws
can weaken the ice. Your vehicle
could fall through the ice and you
and your passengers could
drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
surfaces only.
8-18
Driving and Operating
Driving in Water
{ WARNING
Driving through rushing water can
be dangerous. Deep water can
sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and
you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,
and flood waters demand extreme
caution.
Find out how deep the water is
before driving through it. Do not try
it if it is deep enough to cover the
wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage
the axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive
slowly through it. At faster speeds,
water splashes on the ignition
system and the vehicle can stall.
Stalling can also occur if you get the
tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
under water, you will never be able
to start the engine. When going
through water, remember that when
the brakes get wet, it might take
longer to stop. See Driving on Wet
Roads on page 8‑19.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand,
have the brake linings cleaned and
checked. These substances can
cause glazing and uneven braking.
Check the body structure, steering,
suspension, wheels, tires, axles,
and exhaust system for damage and
check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
The vehicle requires more frequent
service due to off-road use. Refer to
the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Driving and Operating
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-19
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
8-20
Driving and Operating
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
Other driving tips include:
.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
.
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 9‑40.
Turn off cruise control.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
.
Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-21
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 8‑38 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
8-22
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12‑6.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
(two inches) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
(Continued)
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
WARNING (Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑34.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
Driving and Operating
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑58.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-23
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑72.
8-24
Driving and Operating
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
WARNING (Continued)
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
(Continued)
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached near the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 9‑40 and Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46 .
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Driving and Operating
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
8-25
See Trailer Towing on page 8‑61
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 68 kg
(150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
8-26
Driving and Operating
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 68 kg
(150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 91 kg
(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to the lower
center pillar on the driver side of
the vehicle or on the rear edge
of the driver door. The label tells
the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Driving and Operating
Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
{ WARNING
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can. Try
to spread the weight
evenly.
(Continued)
8-27
8-28
Driving and Operating
can be used. Vehicle speeds
above 110 km/h (68 mph)
should be limited to
five minutes per use.
Starting and
Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 8‑58 for the
trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more
information.
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
.
During the first 1 000 km
(600 miles), avoid using more
than moderate acceleration
in lower gears and avoid
vehicle speeds above
110 km/h (68 mph).
.
Between the first 1 000 km
(600 miles) and 5 000 km
(3,000 miles), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
brake pedal.
Driving and Operating
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only
position from which the key can be
removed. This locks the steering
wheel, ignition and automatic
transmission.
On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK/OFF position.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position provides power to some of
the electrical accessories. It unlocks
the steering wheel and ignition. The
transmission is also unlocked in this
position on automatic transmission
vehicles. To move the key from
ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
push in the key and then turn it to
LOCK/OFF.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
ventilation fan and 12 volt power
outlet, as well as to display some
warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the
battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving.
A warning tone sounds when the
driver door is opened if the ignition
is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
key is in the ignition.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-29
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to the audio system will
continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
Power to the power windows and
sunroof will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until any door is
opened.
All these features will work when
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
8-30
Driving and Operating
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed
will go down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow
the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch to
ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5 to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START for a
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each
try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the
procedure. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
To Use The Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on
the passenger side of the engine
compartment, in front of the air
cleaner.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-31
{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
8-32
Driving and Operating
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑40 for more information.
2. Hold the button on the shift lever
and push the lever toward the
front of the vehicle into P (Park).
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key.
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
Release the button and check that
the shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park).
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Driving and Operating
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park
Torque lock is when the weight of
the vehicle puts too much force on
the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously.
To shift out of P (Park):
If torque lock does occur, the
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever.
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
3. Move the shift lever.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), see your dealer
for service.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-33
Parking Over Things
That Burn
{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
8-34
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
{ WARNING
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
.
.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
(Continued)
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑34.
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑32.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission shift
lever is located on the console
between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. Use P (Park) when
starting the engine because the
vehicle cannot move easily.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-35
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 8‑32. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
regular brake first and then press
8-36
Driving and Operating
the shift lever button before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever, then push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
page 8‑33.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23.
N (Neutral): In this position the
engine and transmission do not
connect. Use N (Neutral) to restart a
vehicle that is already moving.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.
Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can
drive in L (Low) when you are
driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
and D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then.
M (Manual Mode): Allows the
driver to select the range of gear
positions. If the vehicle has this
feature, see Manual Mode on
page 8‑37.
Driving and Operating
Manual Mode
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS or manual mode allows for the
selection of the range of gear
positions. Use this mode when
driving down hill or towing a trailer
to limit the top gear and vehicle
speed. The shift position indicator
within the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display a number next to
the M indicating the highest
available gear under manual mode
and the driving conditions when
manual mode was selected.
To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus button on
the shift lever, to increase or
decrease the gear range
available.
When shifting to M (Manual Mode),
the transmission will shift to a preset
lower gear range. For this preset
range, the highest gear available is
displayed next to the M in the DIC.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑24 for more information.
All gears below that number are
available to use. For example, when
4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
shifted automatically. To shift to
5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus)
button or shift into D (Drive).
M (Manual Mode) will prevent
shifting to a lower gear range if the
engine speed is too high. If vehicle
speed is not reduced within the time
allowed, the lower gear range shift
will not be completed. Slow the
vehicle, then press the − (Minus)
button to the desired lower gear
range.
While using the ERS, cruise control
can be used.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-37
Fuel Economy Mode
The vehicle may have a Fuel
Economy Mode. When engaged,
fuel economy mode can improve the
vehicle's fuel economy.
Press the “eco” (economy) button
by the shift lever to turn this feature
on or off. The “eco” light in the
instrument cluster will come on
when engaged. See Fuel Economy
Light on page 4‑22.
8-38
Driving and Operating
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC) an
“ECO Mode On” message displays.
See Fuel System Messages on
page 4‑30 for more information.
When Fuel Economy Mode is on:
.
The transmission will upshift
sooner and downshift later.
.
The torque converter clutch will
apply sooner and stay on longer.
.
The gas pedal will be less
sensitive.
.
The vehicle's computer will more
aggressively shut off fuel to the
engine under deceleration.
.
The engine idle speed will be
lower.
.
Driving performance is more
conservative.
Drive Systems
Brakes
All-Wheel Drive
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
With this feature, engine power is
always sent to all four wheels. It is
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
When using a compact spare tire on
an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on system, replace
the compact spare with a full-size
tire as soon as possible. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑68
for more information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
Driving and Operating
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 4‑20.
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-39
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
might be heard operating, and the
brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
8-40
Driving and Operating
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal down, then
push the parking brake pedal down.
If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑19.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down, then
push down momentarily on the
parking brake pedal until you feel
the pedal release. Slowly pull your
foot up off the park brake pedal.
If the parking brake is not released
when you begin to drive, the brake
system warning light will be on and
a chime will sound warning you that
the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 8‑58.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Driving and Operating
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
(HSA) feature, which may be useful
when the vehicle is stopped on a
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling,
either forward or rearward, during
vehicle drive off. After driver
completely stops and holds the
vehicle in a complete standstill on a
grade, HSA will be automatically
activated. During the transition
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts
to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
HSA holds the braking pressure to
ensure that there is no rolling back.
The brakes will automatically
release when the accelerator pedal
is applied within the two second
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill or if the vehicle is facing
uphill and in R (Reverse).
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that
one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose
traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-41
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
will flash to indicate that the traction
control system is active.
This warning light comes on if there
is a problem with TCS, and the
system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
8-42
Driving and Operating
TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started. To
limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on. But, TCS
can be turned off if needed.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
or accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle's driveline could
be damaged.
On AWD vehicles, when TCS is
turned off, the system may still
make noise. This is normal and
necessary with AWD hardware.
It may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. See
If the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23
for more information. See also
Winter Driving on page 8‑21 for
information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
The TCS off light comes on and
“Traction Control Off” is displayed
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) to indicate that the traction
control system has been turned off.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 4‑31.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Traction control can be turned off by
pressing and releasing the TCS/
StabiliTrak button, on the console,
until the TCS/StabiliTrak light comes
on the instrument panel and
“Traction Control Off” appears in the
DIC. Press the button again to turn
the system back on. For information
on turning StabiliTrak off and on,
see “StabiliTrak System” following in
this section.
Adding non‐GM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 9‑4 for more information.
Driving and Operating
StabiliTrak System
The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a difference
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the intended direction.
8-43
This also occurs when traction
control is activated. A noise may
be heard or vibration may be felt in
the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, a “Service StabiliTrak”
message will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
When this message is displayed
and the StabiliTrak light comes on,
the system is not operational.
Driving should be adjusted
accordingly. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 4‑31.
StabiliTrak can be turned off by
pressing and holding the TCS/
StabiliTrak button, on the console,
until the TCS Off and StabiliTrak Off
lights come on the instrument panel
and “StabiliTrak Off” appears in the
DIC. For information on turning TCS
off and on, see “Traction Control
System (TCS)” earlier in this
section.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. To
assist with directional control of the
vehicle, the system should always
be left on.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
Press the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 8‑44 for more information.
When the stability control system
activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument panel.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-44
Driving and Operating
Cruise Control
With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control is turned off.
If the vehicle has a StabiliTrak® or
traction control system and begins
to limit wheel spin while using
cruise control, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See
StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 8‑41. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the
cruise control can be turned
back on.
{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The cruise control buttons are
located on the steering wheel.
5 (On/Off):
Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
\ (Cancel):
Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the
thumbwheel up to resume a set
speed or to accelerate to a higher
speed.
Driving and Operating
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
thumbwheel down toward SET/−
to set a speed and activate cruise
control, or to make the vehicle
decelerate.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise button turned off when cruise
control is not being used.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied or the Cancel button is
pressed, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the
set speed from memory.
To set a speed:
Once the vehicle reaches about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move
the thumbwheel up toward RES/+
briefly. The vehicle returns to the
speed selected previously and stays
there.
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise
control system on.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
2. Get to the speed desired.
3. Move the thumbwheel down
toward SET/− and release it.
The desired set speed briefly
appears in the instrument panel
cluster.
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Move the thumbwheel up
toward RES/+ and hold it until
the vehicle accelerates to the
desired speed, and then
release it.
.
8-45
To increase the speed in small
amounts, move the thumbwheel
up toward RES/+ briefly and
then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Move the thumbwheel down
toward SET/− and hold until the
desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
.
To slow down in very small
amounts, move the thumbwheel
down toward SET/− briefly and
then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
8-46
Driving and Operating
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle's speed.
When you take your foot off the
pedal, the vehicle will slow down to
the previous set cruise speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to maintain the
vehicle's speed. When the brakes
are applied the cruise control
shuts off.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
.
.
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal
or clutch; when cruise control
disengages, the indicator light
will go off.
\.
Press 5 to turn the cruise
Press
control system off completely.
The cruise control cannot be
resumed.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
the 5 button or if the ignition is
turned off.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Object Detection
Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it assists the driver with parking
and avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
and the sensors on the rear bumper
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
behind the vehicle, and at least
20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.
.
The display is located in the
headliner.
URPA uses three color-coded lights
to provide distance and system
information.
Objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
If the vehicle is traveling faster then
8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the red
light on the rear display flashes.
Objects must be at least 20 cm (8 in)
off the ground, below liftgate level,
and within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear
bumper to be detected. The
distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
A single beep sounds the first time
an object is detected between 0.6 m
(23 in) and 2.5 m (8 ft) away.
Beeping occurs continuously when
the vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in) or closer
to an object.
Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing; vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
8-47
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically and
the display briefly illuminates to
indicate the system is working when
the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse).
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-48
Driving and Operating
The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle
gets closer to a detected object:
Description
Metric
English
amber light
2.5 m
8 ft
amber/amber lights
1.0 m
40 in
amber/amber/red lights and
continuous beeping for
five seconds
0.6 m
23 in
amber/amber/red lights flashing
and continuous beeping for
five seconds
0.3 m
1 ft
Park Assist Off displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑24 for more information.
System Settings
Each time the vehicle is started
URPA defaults to the On setting.
Use the Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34 menu to
configure URPA.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
condition, the message Park Assist
Off displays on the DIC and a red
light is shown on the rear URPA
display when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). This can
occur under the following
conditions:
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 9‑75.
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or an object was
hanging out of the liftgate during
the last drive cycle, a red light
may come on in the rear display.
Once the attached object is
removed, URPA will return to
normal operation.
The settings are:
.
On: Turns URPA on
.
Off: Turns URPA off
.
Tow Bar: Use when a tow bar is
attached to the vehicle
Tow Bar
When the tow bar setting is used,
an area of 16 cm (6 in) around the
hitch is not detected by the system.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Driving and Operating
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle and the tow bar setting is
not being used, or an odd
shaped tow bar is attached to
the vehicle and the tow bar
setting is being used.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
.
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
The RVC can assist the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle.
.
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
.
If the system is still disabled, after
driving forward at least 25 km/h
(15 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer.
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) system. Read this
entire section before using it.
{ WARNING
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
(Continued)
8-49
WARNING (Continued)
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
So if you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could hit a
vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.
8-50
Driving and Operating
Vehicles Without a Navigation
System
Vehicles With a Navigation
System
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video
image automatically appears on the
inside rear view mirror. Once the
driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
the video image automatically
disappears from the inside rear view
mirror.
An image appears on the navigation
screen with the message “Check
Surroundings for Safety” when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The navigation screen goes to the
previous screen after approximately
10 seconds once the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse).
To turn the rear vision camera
system on or off:
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System Off or On
To turn off the RVC system, press
and hold z, located on the inside
rearview mirror, until the left
indicator light turns off. The RVC
display is now disabled.
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
To cancel the delay, do one of the
following:
.
Press a hard key on the
navigation system.
.
Shift into P (Park).
.
Reach a vehicle speed of
8 km/h (5 mph).
To turn the RVC system on again,
press and hold z until the left
indicator light illuminates. The RVC
system display is now enabled and
the display will appear in the mirror
normally.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
4. Select Camera. When a check
mark appears next to the
Camera option, then the RVC
system is on.
Driving and Operating
Symbols
Guidelines
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system
must not be disabled to use the
caution symbols. The error message
“Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable” may display if URPA
has been disabled and the symbols
have been turned on. See
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 8‑46.
The RVC system has a guideline
overlay that can help the driver align
the vehicle when backing into a
parking spot.
The symbols appear and may cover
an object when viewing the
navigation screen when an object is
detected by the URPA system.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Symbols. When a check
mark appears next to the
Symbols option, symbols will
appear.
8-51
Rear Vision Camera Location
To turn the guidelines on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Guidelines. When a
check mark appears next to the
Guidelines option, guidelines will
appear.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
SYSTEM: This message can
display on the navigation screen
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other
vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The camera is located above the
license plate.
The area displayed by the camera is
limited.
It does not display objects that are
close to either corner or under the
bumper and can vary depending on
vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
different from the actual distance.
8-52
Driving and Operating
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
A. View displayed by the camera.
.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
The RVC system may not work
properly or display a clear image if:
.
The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
the camera lens.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
The RVC system display in the
rearview mirror may turn off or not
appear as expected due to one of
the following conditions. If this
occurs the left indicator light on the
mirror will flash.
.
A slow flash may indicate a loss
of video signal, or no video
signal present during the reverse
cycle.
Driving and Operating
.
A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the
maximum allowable time during
a reverse cycle, or the display
has reached an over
temperature limit.
The fast flash conditions are
used to protect the video device
from high temperature
conditions. Once conditions
return to normal the device will
reset and the green indicator will
stop flashing.
During any of these fault conditions,
the display will be blank and the
indicator will continue to flash as
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
or until the conditions return to
normal.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-53
8-54
Driving and Operating
Recommended Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814 in the
United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5
or 3.511 in Canada. Some
gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel
Additives on page 8‑55 for
additional information.
California Fuel
Requirements
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑16. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Driving and Operating
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean,
or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP
TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change, can
help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-55
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
8-56
Driving and Operating
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is behind the fuel door
on the vehicle's passenger side.
Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise
to remove. Do not release the cap
too soon or it will spring back.
Reinstall the cap by turning it
clockwise until it clicks.
If the cap is not properly installed,
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
come on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑16 for more
information.
{ WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Do not top off or overfill the tank and
wait a few seconds before removing
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 9‑75.
{ WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer. The
wrong type fuel cap might not fit
properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑16.
Driving and Operating
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
{ WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
WARNING (Continued)
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
8-57
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.
For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips”.
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing”.
.
For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment”.
8-58
Driving and Operating
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 9‑72. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle — such as a motorhome,
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 9‑72.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
{ WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer when
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. For trailering
capacity, see “Trailer Towing”
following in this section. Trailering
changes handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel
economy. With the added weight,
the engine, transmission, wheel
assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder and under greater
loads. The trailer also adds wind
resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements. For safe trailering,
correctly use the proper trailering
equipment.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules for
your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
.
During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
Driving and Operating
.
Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode
when towing.
.
Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
.
For vehicles with the Ultra Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system,
turn the system off when towing
a trailer. If the tow bar is
installed while not towing a
trailer, change the URPA system
to the “Tow Bar” setting. See
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 8‑46 for more information.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
Following Distance
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Passing
Towing with a Stability Control
System
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-59
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.
8-60
Driving and Operating
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers.
Turn Signals When Towing
a Trailer
The turn signal indicators on the
instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps also flash, telling other
drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows
on the instrument panel flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Check occasionally
to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 9‑18.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before starting down a long or
steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
will boil at a lower temperature than
at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To
avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground,
with the transmission in P (Park) for
a few minutes before turning the
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
{ WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
Driving and Operating
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift into a gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 9‑18.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-61
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
The total weight on the vehicle's
tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature, special
equipment, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry
must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
8-62
Driving and Operating
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh,
based upon the vehicle model and options.
Maximum Trailer
Weight with Trailer
Brakes†
GCWR*
L4 Engine, FWD
680 kg (1,500 lbs)
2 625 kg (5,787 lbs)
L4 Engine, AWD
680 kg (1,500 lbs)
2 700 kg (5,952 lbs)
V6 Engine, FWD
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
3 600 kg (7,937 lbs)
V6 Engine, AWD
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)
Vehicle
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.
† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg
(1,000 lbs) and the GCWR is 2 300 kg (5,071 lbs). See Towing Equipment
on page 8‑63 for more information.
*The Gross Combination Weight
Rating (GCWR) is the total
allowable weight of the completely
loaded vehicle and trailer including
any passengers, cargo, equipment
and conversions. The GCWR for the
vehicle should not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice. See
Customer Assistance Offices on
page 12‑3 for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
If a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch is being
used, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
Driving and Operating
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating). The effect of
additional weight may reduce the
trailering capacity more than the
total of the additional weight.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires
Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These
numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24 for more
information. Do not go over the
GVW limit for the vehicle, or the
GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight
distributing hitch, do not go over the
rear axle limit before applying the
weight distribution spring bars.
It is important that the vehicle
does not exceed any of its
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8-63
Towing Equipment
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 8‑34.
8-64
Driving and Operating
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) feature as part of the
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
that the trailer is swaying, the
vehicle's brakes are automatically
applied.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
When TSC is applying the brakes,
the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light
flashes to notify the driver to reduce
speed. See Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 4‑21. If the trailer continues to
sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine
torque to help slow the vehicle.
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is
turned off.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑35.
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 9-11
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-13
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Power Steering Fluid (2.4L
L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Power Steering Fluid (3.0L
V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-25
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-26
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-1
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . 9-32
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Electrical System
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9-2
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . .
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-40
9-40
9-42
9-43
9-46
9-47
9-49
9-52
9-52
9-53
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .
9-54
9-55
9-56
9-57
9-57
9-58
9-59
9-61
9-68
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Vehicle Care
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-4
Vehicle Care
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories to the vehicle can affect
vehicle performance and safety,
including such things as airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑35.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
{ WARNING
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
Vehicle Care
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.
Hood
To open the hood:
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑34.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 10‑10.
9-5
1. Pull the release handle with the
symbol on it. It is below the
instrument panel, to the left of
the steering wheel.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2. Move the secondary hood
release lever to the right to
release the striker. The lever is
near the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, check all
filler caps are properly installed.
9-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Vehicle Care
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑13.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 9‑21.
B. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
F.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of
view). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑34.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑69.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑69.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-7
I.
Battery on page 9‑24.
J.
Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑15.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21.
9-8
Vehicle Care
3.0L V6 Engine
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Vehicle Care
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑13.
G. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑34.
B. Power Steering Fluid (2.4L L4
Engine) on page 9‑20 or
Power Steering Fluid (3.0L
V6 Engine) on page 9‑20.
H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑69.
I.
Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑69.
D. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
J.
Battery on page 9‑24.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of
view). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10.
K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑15.
F.
L.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 9‑21.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21.
9-9
Engine Cover
3.0L V6 Engine Cover
To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap.
2. Hold cover on both sides and
pull upward.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Install cover by aligning on oil fill
tube, then firmly pushing down
onto the intake manifold.
5. Install the oil fill cap.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-10
Vehicle Care
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must
be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a
yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add at
least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 11‑2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil that
the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM6094M.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
Vehicle Care
.
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result
in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
9-11
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
If in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30
engine oil. Both provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. Always use an oil
that meets the required
specification, GM6094M.
When to Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the starburst
symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑30. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 1 000 km
(600 miles). It is possible that,
if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least
9-12
Vehicle Care
once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer
has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the vehicle has Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons:
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
3. Press and hold the set/clear
button until “100%” is displayed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
with the engine off.
2. Press the DIC menu button until
“Remaining Oil Life” displays.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the
“Change Engine Oil Soon” message
goes off.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains elements
that can be unhealthy for your skin
and could even cause cancer. Do
not let used oil stay on your skin.
Clean your skin and nails with soap
and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing
or rags. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and
disposal of oil products.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, this should be
done at your dealer service
department. Contact your dealer for
additional information or the
procedure can be found in the
service manual. To purchase a
service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2, and be
sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2 for more information.
If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
9-13
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5.
2. Locate the air filter housing on
the front passenger side of the
engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
3. Remove the four air cleaner
housing cover screws.
4. Pull straight up on cover, and
while holding the cover, remove
the air filter.
9-14
Vehicle Care
How to Reinstall Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
1. Install the air cleaner into the air
cleaner housing. The outer air
cleaner filter seal must be fitted
properly in the air cleaner
housing.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
Cooling System
2. Align the air cleaner housing
cover tabs to the air cleaner
housing.
3. Install the air cleaner housing
cover using the four screws.
3.0 L V6 Engine
A. Engine Cooling Fans
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
{ WARNING
2.4 L L4 Engine
A. Engine Cooling Fan
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care
If the coolant inside the coolant
surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the
COLD FILL line. If it is not, there
might be a leak at the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with
the engine on, check to see if the
electric engine cooling fan is
running. If the engine is
overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-15
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years
or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 9‑18.
9-16
Vehicle Care
What to Use
{ WARNING
Adding only plain water to the
cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or
above the COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before
this is done. See Engine
Overheating on page 9‑18 for more
information.
The coolant surge tank is located in
the engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for more information on
location.
Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank
{ WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-17
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
The coolant surge tank pressure
cap can be removed when the
cooling system, including the surge
tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot.
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
heard, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Keep turning the cap and
remove it.
9-18
Vehicle Care
time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be
lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the
coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the line pointed to on
the front of the coolant
surge tank.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture to the COLD
FILL line.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the
upper radiator hose starts
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s). By this
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of engine overheating. There is an
engine coolant temperature warning
light on the vehicle's instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑14.
5. Replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand–tight and full seated.
Decide whether to lift the hood
when this warning appears, or get
service help instead.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
If lifting the hood , make sure the
vehicle is parked on a level surface.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
Vehicle Care
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-19
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is
no longer in the overheat zone or an
overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.
9-20
Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid
(2.4L L4 Engine)
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
The vehicle has electric power
steering and does not use power
steering fluid.
The power steering fluid does not
need to be checked unless there is
a leak in the system. Have the
system inspected and repaired if
there is a fluid loss.
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
Power Steering Fluid
(3.0L V6 Engine)
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
To check:
1. Turn the engine off and let it
cool down.
2. Remove the engine cover. Refer
to Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
The power steering fluid reservoir is
to the rear of the engine
compartment on the passenger side
of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6.
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The fluid level should be between
MAX and MIN line at room
temperature. If the fluid is on or
below MIN line, add fluid.
What to Use
For the proper fluid, see
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Vehicle Care
Washer Fluid
What to Use
Read the manufacturer's
instructions before refilling the
windshield washer fluid. If operating
the vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Notice:
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it and add washer fluid
until full. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 9‑6 for
reservoir location.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage
the tank if it is
completely full.
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-21
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake
wear warning sound is heard,
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
9-22
Vehicle Care
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Brake Fluid
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
Vehicle Care
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑19.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
{ WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-23
9-24
Vehicle Care
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a
new battery is needed.
{ DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 9‑69 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
How to Check Lubricant
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to change it.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
If the level is below the bottom of
the filler plug hole, located on the
transfer case, you will need to add
some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid
loss could indicate a problem; check
and have it repaired, if needed.
Vehicle Care
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine what kind of lubricant
to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑40.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
System Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑40.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-25
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do not
start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to
move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
9-26
Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
.
To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Front Wiper Blade
Replacement
To replace the front wiper blades:
1. Lift the wiper arm from the
windshield until no further
movement is possible.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear and cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2 for more information.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. For proper type and
length, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
2. Press the square button on the
top side, at the end of the wiper
arm, and pull the wiper blade out
of the end of the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade connector
by sliding into the end of the
wiper arm until the square button
on the wiper blade clicks into
place with the wiper arm.
4. Place the wiper arm with the
wiper blade in place back on the
windshield.
Vehicle Care
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
To replace the rear wiper blade:
1. Lift the wiper arm from the
liftgate glass until no further
movement is possible.
2. Hold the wiper arm at the tip with
one hand and hold the wiper
blade at the tip with the
other hand.
9-27
4. Place the wiper blade into the
wiper arm aligning the blade
attachment rivet with the arm
attachment.
Headlamp Aiming
5. Align the wiper blade with the
arm and hold both ends of the
arm while gently squeezing until
the blade snaps into place.
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the aim of the headlamps
may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
Do not apply excessive force
during this operation.
It is recommended that a dealer
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim the
headlamps yourself, use the
following procedure.
3. Pull down on the wiper blade.
The blade will pull away from
the arm.
Reposition the blade in the arm
and repeat, if blade is not
correctly positioned.
6. Place the wiper arm with the
wiper blade attached back on
the liftgate glass.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The headlamp aiming system has
been preset at the factory.
The vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows. The vehicle:
.
Should be placed so the
headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) from
a light colored wall.
.
Must have all four tires on a
level surface which is level all
the way to the wall.
.
Should be placed so it is
perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.
9-28
Vehicle Care
.
Should not have any snow, ice,
or mud on it.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the
following:
.
Should be fully assembled and
all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being
performed.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5 for more information.
.
Should be normally loaded with
a full tank of fuel and one person
or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the
driver's seat.
.
Tires should be properly inflated.
4. At the wall measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The
high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low‐beam headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
Vehicle Care
9-29
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with a E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line.
Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
9-30
Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 9‑34.
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps
To replace:
1. Turn the tire to reach the access
port cap located on front of
wheel well cover.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
A. Low Beam Headlamp
B. High Beam headlamp
C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp
D. Side Marker Lamp
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
A. Screw
B. Access Port Cap
2. Remove screw (A) and turn
access port cap (B)
counterclockwise to remove.
Vehicle Care
3. If replacing low/high headlamp
bulb, remove the dust cover cap
from the back of the headlamp
housing by turning the cap
counterclockwise.
Fog Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the
electrical connector.
5. Remove the bulb from the
socket or disconnect bulb
assembly from harness
connector.
6. Install new bulb.
8. Replace the dust cover cap on
headlamps.
9. Reinstall the wheel well cover
access port cap and secure by
installing screw.
3. Remove the old bulb from the
bulb socket and push the new
bulb straight into the bulb socket
until it connects.
4. Push the bulb socket into the fog
lamp assembly and turn
clockwise to lock it into place.
4. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove from
lamp assembly.
7. Reinstall the lamp socket to
lamp assembly turning
clockwise.
9-31
1. Locate the fog lamp assembly
under the front facia.
2. Disconnect the bulb socket from
the electrical connector, turn and
pull out the bulb assembly.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-32
Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/
Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
To replace one of these lamps:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑8 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑8.
5. Disconnect the lamp wiring
harness.
6. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it out.
A. Screw
B. Screw Cover
7. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
2. Remove the two screw
covers (B) from the taillamp
assembly.
8. Install the new bulb.
3. Remove the two screws (A)
securing the taillamp assembly.
10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 to
reinstall lamp assembly.
4. Pull taillamp assembly out of
vehicle body.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9. Push the bulb socket in and turn
it clockwise.
Vehicle Care
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Pull the lamp assembly down to
remove from liftgate.
9-33
5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket.
6. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install into lamp assembly.
1. Open the liftgate partway. See
Liftgate (Manual) on page 1‑8
or Liftgate (Power) on
page 1‑8 for more information.
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
C. Lamp Assembly
Passenger side shown, driver side
similar
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove from
lamp assembly (C).
2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-34
Vehicle Care
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Electrical System
Bulb
Number
Back-Up Lamp
921
Fog Lamp Front
H11
Headlamp
High Beam
HB3
Headlamp
Low Beam
H11
License Plate Lamp
W5WLL
Parking Lamp/Turn
Signal Front
T20
Sidemarker Front
and Rear
194
Taillamp/Turn Signal
Lamp/Stop Lamp
3157K
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by
fuses. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
to replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
There are two fuse blocks in the
vehicle: one in the engine
compartment and one in the
instrument panel.
There is a fuse puller located in the
engine compartment fuse block.
See Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑34. It can be used
to easily remove fuses from the fuse
block.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To remove the fuse block cover,
squeeze the clips on the cover and
lift it straight up.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Vehicle Care
J-Case
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
1
Cool Fan 1
2
Cool Fan 2
3
Rear Defog
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
4
Power Windows –
Right
5
Memory Seat
Module
9-35
Usage
6
Power Seat – Left
7
Instrument Panel
Fuse Block 1
8
Instrument Panel
Fuse Block 2
9
Starter
10
Brake Booster
11
Sunroof
12
Antilock Brake
System Pump
13
Instrument Panel
Fuse Block 3
14
Power Windows
– Left
15
Antilock Brake
System Module
9-36
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
28
16
29
Rear Wiper
17
Trailer Parking Light
30
Air Conditioning
Compressor
18
Engine Control
Module Battery
31
Rear Latch
32
Horn
33
Right High‐Beam
Headlamp
34
Left High‐Beam
Headlamp
19
Heated Mirror
20
Trailer Left
21
Lift Gate Module
Wiper
22
Power Lumbar
23
Trailer Right
35
Ignition Even Coil
24
Canister Vent
36
Ignition Odd Coil
25
Memory Mirror
Module
37
Windshield Washer
38
Front Fog Lamps
26
Regulated Voltage
Control Battery
Sensor
39
Post Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor
27
Rear Accessory
Power Outlet
40
Engine Control
Module
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Mini Fuses
Usage
41
Pre–Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor
42
Transmission
Control Module
43
Mirror
44
Chassis Control
Module Ignition
45
Spare
46
Rear Drive Module
47
Lift Gate Module
Logic
48
Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Ignition
49
Heated Seat – Front
50
Chassis Control
Module
51
Engine Control
Module
52
Rear Vision Camera
Vehicle Care
Midi Fuse
53
Usage
Mini Relays
Electric Power
Steering
Micro
Relays
Usage
54
Rear Defogger
55
Cooling Fan Low
56
Head Lamp
High Beam
57
Cooling Fan Control
58
Wiper On/Off
Control
59
Air Conditioning
Compressor
60
Wiper Speed
61
Fog Lamp
62
Engine Control
63
Starter
64
Run/Crank
Usage
65
Cooling Fan High
66
Brake Booster
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block
is located on the passenger
side panel of the center console.
To access the fuses, open the fuse
panel door from the passenger side
by pulling it out.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-37
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs
on the bottom of the door into the
console first, then push the door
back into its original location.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
9-38
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
6
Body Control
Module 7
7
Noise Control
Module
8
Body Control
Module 4
9
Radio
10
SEO Battery
11
Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Aid Module
12
Heater, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
Battery
13
Auxiliary Power
Front
14
Heater, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
Ignition
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Mini Fuses
Usage
1
Steering Wheel DM
2
Spare
3
Spare
Mini Fuses
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Usage
4
Body Control
Module 1
5
Infotainment
Usage
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
15
Display
16
Body Control
Module 5
Mini Fuses
Usage
30
Body Control
Module 3
31
Amplifier
17
Auxiliary
Power Rear
32
Discrete Logic
Ignition Switch
18
Instrument Panel
Cluster Ignition
33
Communications
Integration Module
19
PDI Module
34
20
Body Control
Module 6
Body Control
Module 2
35
SDM Battery
21
SEO Retained
Accessory Power
36
Data Link
Connection
22
SDM Ignition
37
23
Spare
Instrument Panel
Cluster Battery
24
Spare
38
25
PRNDL
IOS Module
(Passenger Sensing
System)
26
Spare
39
Spare
27
Spare
28
Spare
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
J‐Case
Fuses
9-39
Usage
29
Front Blower Motor
40
Body Control
Module 8
Relays
Usage
41
LOG Relay
42
Retained Accessory
Power Relay
9-40
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer.
WARNING (Continued)
.
Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your
tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46.
.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
.
Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged,
replace them.
{ WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
.
Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24.
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
Vehicle Care
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
9-41
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 9‑56 .
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a
regular road tire has lost air and
gone flat. If your vehicle has a
9-42
Vehicle Care
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑68 and If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑59 .
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 9‑46 .
(F) Tire Size : A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
Vehicle Care
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias
ply construction; and the letter B
means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some
examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-43
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 9‑46 .
9-44
Vehicle Care
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑24 .
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 .
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 .
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24 .
Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions.
Vehicle Care
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 .
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-45
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 9‑53 .
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 9‑56 .
9-46
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 68 kg
(150 lbs) plus the rated cargo
load. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 .
Tire Pressure
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24 .
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
.
Unusual wear
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
.
Poor handling
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from
road hazards
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or
irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
Vehicle Care
For additional information
regarding how much weight your
vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24 . How
you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. The compact
spare should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑68 .
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-47
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle's
tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
9-48
Vehicle Care
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑49 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for information regarding
Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle's tires and transmits the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑24.
At the same time a message to
check the pressure in a specific tire
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire
pressure warning light and the DIC
warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation
and displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑24.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-49
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure on
page 9‑46.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 9‑52, Tire Rotation on
page 9‑52 and Tires on page 9‑40.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire
sealant is not covered by your
warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
9-50
Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
.
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you
re‐install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
.
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer for
service.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 9‑54.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer for
service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer for service.
Vehicle Care
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a
tire you can use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
than two minutes, to match the first
tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
9-51
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
6. Start with the driver side
front tire.
1. Set the parking brake.
7. Remove the valve cap from the
valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure
for five seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to
30 seconds to sound, confirms
that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this
tire and wheel position.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
3. Use the MENU button to select
the Vehicle Information Menu in
the Driver Information Center
(DIC). Use the arrow keys to
scroll to the Tire Pressure
screen.
4. Press the SET/CLR button to
begin the sensor matching
process.
A message asking if you are
sure you want to begin this
process should appear.
5. Press the SET/CLR button again
to confirm the selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the Tire Learning Active
message displays on the DIC
screen.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
8. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 7.
9. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 7.
9-52
Vehicle Care
10. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 7. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
matching process is no longer
active. The Tire Learning
Active message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
12. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
13. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage. See When
It Is Time for New Tires on
page 9‑53 for more information.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to
8,000 miles). See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2 .
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon as
possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 9‑53 and Wheel
Replacement on page 9‑57 .
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 9‑46 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑24 .
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
Vehicle Care
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑49 .
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 11‑2 .
{
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
The vehicle needs new tires if any
of the following statements are true:
.
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑59.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or
less of tread remaining.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-53
The rubber in tires degrades over
time. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it
is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
9-54
Vehicle Care
wear out before they degrade due to
age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it
was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of your
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑40
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
See Tire Inspection on page 9‑52
and Tire Rotation on page 9‑52
for information on proper tire
rotation.
{ WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 9‑68 .
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and
bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning that
is higher or lower than the
proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 9‑47 .
Your vehicle's original
equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information
Label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑24 , for more
information about the Tire and
Loading Information Label and
its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-55
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{ WARNING
If you add different sized wheels,
your vehicle may not provide an
acceptable level of performance
and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on
page 9‑54 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑4 for
additional information.
9-56
Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked.
If the vehicle vibrates when driving
on a smooth road, the tires and
wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
9-58
Vehicle Care
which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑59 for more information.
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
(Continued)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
(Continued)
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove
the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle's wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-59
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
9-60
Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 5‑2.
{ WARNING
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
WARNING (Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
A. Wheel Block
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
B. Flat Tire
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
9-61
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 9‑59 for more
information.
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑8 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑8.
2. For vehicles with wheel nut
caps, turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove them.
2. Lift the load floor up.
4. Turn the retainer nut
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire.
5. Place the spare tire next to the
tire being changed.
3. Remove the extension (A),
wheel wrench (B) and jack (C).
Place the tools next to the tire
being changed.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Do not try to remove plastic caps
from the cover or center cap.
3. For vehicles with a wheel cover
or center cap, pull the cover or
center cap away from the wheel
to remove it. Store the wheel
cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
9-62
Vehicle Care
6. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire.
The location is indicated by a
mark on the bottom edge of the
front and rear door plastic
molding. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
4. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
Front
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Place the jack notch (A) under
the frame rail seam (B).
7. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
Rear
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
{ WARNING
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-63
8. Fit the jack handle extension
onto the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack.
9-64
Vehicle Care
9. Insert the other end of the jack
handle into the wrench.
10. Place the jack under the
vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
11. Raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough
room for the road tire to clear
the ground.
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑59.
15. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
16. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
12. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
13. Remove the flat tire.
17. Lower the vehicle by
turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
(Continued)
9-65
14. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-66
Vehicle Care
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 11‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{ WARNING
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
19. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
20. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
When reinstalling the wheel cover or
center cap on the full-size tire,
tighten all five plastic caps hand
snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with the
wheel wrench an additional one‐
quarter of a turn.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Vehicle Care
9-67
To store the flat tire:
1. Remove the cable package. The
cable is stored in a plastic bag
under the compact spare tire.
4. Pull the cable (A) through the
door striker (D) then the center
of the wheel (C).
2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear
storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
5. Hook the cable onto the outside
portion of the liftgate hinges (B).
6. Hook the other end of the cable
onto the outside portion of the
liftgate hinge on the other side of
the vehicle.
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it
is secure.
9-68
Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
8. Make sure the metal tube is
centered at the striker. Push the
tube toward the front of the
vehicle.
9. Close the liftgate and make sure
it is latched properly.
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 105 km/h
(65 mph) for distances up to
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Vehicle Care
Jump Starting
Jump starting can be used on
vehicles with run‐down batteries by
using jumper cables and another
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
{ WARNING
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-69
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely. Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to the
vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not work,
and it could damage the vehicle.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
9-70
Vehicle Care
1. The vehicle used to jump start
must have 12-volt battery with a
negative ground.
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
4. Locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals on both
vehicles. Some vehicles have
remote jump starting terminals.
The remote negative (−)
terminal (B) is a stud behind the
metal tab stamped with GND (−)
near the driver side strut tower.
6. The jumper cables should be in
good working condition with no
loose or missing insulation. The
vehicles could be damaged if
they are not.
2. The vehicles should be close
enough for the jumper cables to
reach, but the vehicles should
not be touching. Touching could
cause grounding and possible
electrical system damage.
Put both vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brake firmly.
3. Unplug accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the
accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. Turn off the ignition
on both vehicles.
5. The remote positive (+)
terminal (A) is located on the
underhood fuse block, on the
driver side. Lift the red cap to
uncover the terminal.
{ WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
7. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Vehicle Care
8. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
11. Start the vehicle with the good
battery and run the engine.
9. Connect the black negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal
of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
13. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it needs
service.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
10. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable away from
the dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move.
9-71
12. Press the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry
transmitter to disarm the
security system, if equipped.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
9-72
Vehicle Care
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles,
Towing
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
Towing the Vehicle
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the underhood fuse block
cover to its original position,
if applicable.
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all four
wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service if the disabled vehicle must
be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 12‑6.
To tow the vehicle behind
another vehicle for recreational
purposes — such as behind a
motorhome, see Recreational
Vehicle Towing following.
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is
towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing
is towing the vehicle with two
wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known as a
dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Vehicle Care
.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
5. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove fuse 32,
the Discrete Logic Ignition
Switch fuse, from the instrument
panel fuse block and store it in a
safe location. See Instrument
Panel Fuse Block on page 9‑37.
Dinghy Towing
Front-wheel‐drive and
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be
dinghy towed from the front. These
vehicles can also be towed by
placing them on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the
ground. For other towing options,
see “Dolly Towing” following in this
section.
For vehicles being dinghy towed,
the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
9-73
To tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle that will be
towed and secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
3. Shift the transmission to
N (Neutral).
4. Turn all accessories off.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
without performing each of the
steps listed under “Dinghy
Towing,” the automatic
transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the
dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
9-74
Vehicle Care
Once the destination has been
reached:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Install fuse 32, the Discrete
Logic Ignition Switch fuse. See
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
page 9‑37.
5. Start the engine and let it idle for
more than three minutes before
driving the vehicle.
Notice: Too much or too little
fluid can damage the
transmission. Be sure that the
transmission fluid is at the proper
level before towing with all four
wheels on the ground.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with
the front drive wheels on the
ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with
two different tire sizes on the
front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the
transmission.
Dolly Towing
(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐Drive
Vehicles)
All-wheel‐drive vehicles should not
be towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
To tow the vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
Vehicle Care
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
Appearance Care
5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the
vehicle and dolly for towing.
Exterior Care
9-75
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
6. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-76
Vehicle Care
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Vehicle Care
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and
other chrome trim may be
damaged if the vehicle is not
washed after driving on roads
that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always
wash the vehicle's chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-77
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
9-78
Vehicle Care
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Wipers can be damaged by:
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
.
Heat and sun
Finish Damage
.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body
and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Vehicle Care
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-79
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
9-80
.
.
Vehicle Care
Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
.
Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
Vehicle Care
Leather
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat, steam,
or spot lifters or spot removers,
or shoe polish on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings
that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
9-81
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
9-82
Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Service and Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10
General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep
the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
10-1
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑24.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
10-2
Service and Maintenance
.
Are driven off-road in the
recommended manner. See
Off-Road Driving on page 8‑8.
.
Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 8‑54.
{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 9‑4.
At your dealer, you can be certain
that you will receive the highest
level of service available.
Your dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as, up to
date tools and equipment to ensure
fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 10‑9. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire
Rotation on page 9‑52.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as
soon as possible, within the next
1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
the best conditions, the engine oil
life system might not indicate the
need for vehicle service for more
than a year. The engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a
year and the oil life system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
Service and Maintenance
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑11.
.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
message displays, certain services,
checks, and inspections are
required. The services described for
Maintenance I should be performed
at every engine oil change. The
services described for Maintenance
II should be performed when:
.
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑52.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation
on page 9‑52.
.
Fluids visual leak check (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and the
fluid level checked.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection (vehicles driven in
dusty conditions only). See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑13.
.
Brake system inspection (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 9‑15.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46.
.
Maintenance I was performed
the last time the engine oil was
changed.
It has been 10 months or more
since the Change Engine Oil
Soon message has displayed or
since the last service.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
10-3
Maintenance II
.
Perform all services described in
Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.
Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 9‑75. Worn or
damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9‑26.
10-4
.
.
.
.
Service and Maintenance
Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and sunroof (if
equipped) lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 2‑21.
Automatic transmission fluid
level check and adding fluid,
if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
page 9‑12.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13.
.
Passenger compartment air
filter replacement (or every
12 months, whichever comes
first). More frequent replacement
may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty
conditions.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 9‑15.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑52.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Once a Year
.
See Starter Switch Check on
page 9‑25.
.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control System
Check on page 9‑25.
.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 9‑25.
.
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 9‑26.
.
Engine cooling system and
pressure cap pressure check.
Radiator and air conditioning
condenser outside cleaning. See
Cooling System on page 9‑14.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
Service and Maintenance
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See
Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑12.
Transfer case fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles
mainly driven in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System on page 9‑14. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt
inspection for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An
Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 9‑12.
.
Transfer case fluid change
(normal service).
.
Spark plug replacement. An
Emission Control Service.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
10-5
10-6
Service and Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance
II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
•
•
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
•
•
Tire inflation pressures check.
•
•
Tire wear inspection.
•
•
Rotate tires.
•
•
Fluids visual leak check.
•
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
•
•
Brake system inspection.
•
•
Steering and suspension inspection.
•
Engine cooling system inspection.
•
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
•
Body components lubrication.
•
Restraint system components check.
•
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
•
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Service and Maintenance
10-7
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑15.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
(V6 engines only)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
10-8
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive)
Key Lock Cylinders
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668, in
Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Service and Maintenance
10-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
25899727
A3138C
2.4L L4 Engine
12605566
PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine
89017524
PF48
19130294
CF177
2.4L L4 Engine
12620540
41-108
3.0L V6 Engine
12622561
41-109
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in)
20794123
—
Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in)
20794124
—
Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in)
25788783
—
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
10-10
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Serviced By
Services Performed
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Serviced By
Services Performed
10-11
10-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Serviced By
Services Performed
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
11-1
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
11-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine
7.8 L
8.2 qt
3.0L V6 Engine
10.2 L
10.8 qt
2.4L L4 Engine
4.7 L
5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine
5.7 L
6.0 qt
2.4L L4 Engine
71.1 L
18.8 gal
3.0L V6 Engine
79.1 L
20.9 gal
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Technical Data
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic*
8.5 L
9.0 qt
3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic*
9.0 L
9.5 qt
170 Y
125 ft lb
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑12 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
W
Automatic
0.9 mm (0.035 in)
3.0L V6
Y
Automatic
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
11-3
11-4
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.0L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-15
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-1
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
12-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This is available from the
vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Customer Information
STEP THREE — Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-3
Customer Assistance
Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer
Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
12-4
Customer Information
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer
Assistance
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional # 843
Col. Granada
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
chevrolet
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Online Owner Center
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more
.
Online service and maintenance
records
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for
service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
.
OnStar® and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries
Customer Information
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
My GM Canada (Canada) —
www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
access to:
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers: Save details such
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
.
My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-5
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
This program, available to qualified
applicants for cost reimbursement of
eligible aftermarket adaptive
equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift for the
vehicle.
For more information on the limited
offer visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
12-6
Customer Information
Roadside Assistance
Program
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
.
Description of the problem
Services Provided
For Canadian purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
.
Telephone number of your
location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
Coverage
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Customer Information
.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire
with the spare tire. The spare
tire, if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the
tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometres from where
your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-7
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy of
the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give you
permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
12-8
Customer Information
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
Program
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact your
dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service
appointment and advising your
service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer
can help minimize your
inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base
Warranty Coverage period in
Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both
the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer
you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
you with shuttle service to get you
to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip
shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
Customer Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See
your dealer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be
limited and must be supported by
original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-9
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
12-10
Customer Information
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Customer Information
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 12‑6.
Gather the following information:
.
Driver's name, address, phone
number
.
Driver's license number
.
Owner's name, address, phone
number
.
Vehicle license plate
.
Vehicle make, model and
model year
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-11
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Insurance company and policy
number
.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 2‑28.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a
pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new
12-12
Customer Information
Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Service Manuals
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering,
body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as cost stays within reasonable
limits.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order
Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles. To
request an order form, specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
at: helminc.com
Customer Information
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-13
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
12-14
Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to
notifying General Motors of Canada
Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
Customer Information
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.
How various systems in your
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
12-15
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
12-16
Customer Information
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on
data collection and use. See also
OnStar® System on page 4‑39 in
this manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
INDEX
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-35
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-13
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-28
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-25
Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-15
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-24
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Antenna
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-32
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
i-1
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-35
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Shiftlock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31
i-2
INDEX
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-26
Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-31
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-33
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-1
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-16
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-25
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-45
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-54
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-43
INDEX
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, 4-10
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Covers
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-15
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
i-3
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-24
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Driving
Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .8-20
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-23
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
i-4
INDEX
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
E
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Economy Mode
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Cooling System Messages . . .4-29
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-34
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-15
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-2
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-31
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-54
INDEX
Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-54
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-22
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Requirements, California . . . . .8-54
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
G
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-23
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-1
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-23
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
i-5
Heater
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-20
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1
i-6
INDEX
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-31
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-16
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Light
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Lights (cont.)
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-1
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-14
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-22
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
INDEX
M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-16
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-32
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-29
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Messages (cont.)
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Object Detection System . . . . .4-31
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
i-7
N
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
O
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 9-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-37
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
i-8
INDEX
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Overview
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Overview, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5
P
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Parking
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-33
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-30
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . .
6-42, 6-43,
6-46, 6-58
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-29
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-16
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-49
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-8
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
INDEX
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-72
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-36
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Ride Control Systems
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-22
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-21
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
i-9
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-5
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-3
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-54
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
i-10
INDEX
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-34
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Sidemarker
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Storage
Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Storage Areas
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
System
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
System Check
Automatic Transmission
Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
INDEX
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Taillamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-13
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, 4-10
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-49
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-47
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-57
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-58
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-57
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-64
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
i-11
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-41
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .8-64
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Turn Signal
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
i-12
INDEX
U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-46
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
W
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Where to Put the Child
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-26
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8